infiniti G37-09-Coupe6

RESTRAINTS

C

D

E

SECTION SBCA

B

SEAT BELT CONTROL SYSTEM

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

BC

N

O

P

CONTENTS

S

BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 3

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 3Work Flow .................................................................3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT SYSTEM ................... 6System Diagram ........................................................6System Description ...................................................6Component Parts Location ........................................7Component Description .............................................7

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT) .................................................................. 9

CONSULT-III Function ..............................................9

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .........................10

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............................10Description ..............................................................10DTC Logic ...............................................................10Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................10

B2451 SB MOTOR RH CIRC .............................11Description ..............................................................11DTC Logic ...............................................................11Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................11

B2452 SB MOTOR LH CIRC .............................13Description ..............................................................13DTC Logic ...............................................................13Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................13

B2453 BR STROKE SEN CIRC .........................15Description ..............................................................15DTC Logic ...............................................................15Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................15Component Inspection ............................................16

B2454 MOTOR PWR SUP CIRC .......................18Description ..............................................................18

DTC Logic ................................................................18Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................18

B2455 PSB C/U INT CIRCUIT ..........................19Description ...............................................................19DTC Logic ................................................................19Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH ........................20

DRIVER SIDE .............................................................20DRIVER SIDE : Description .....................................20DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ..........20DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .....................20DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ...................21

PASSENGER SIDE ....................................................21PASSENGER SIDE : Description ............................21PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

....21PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............22PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ..........23

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....24Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ..............25

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT ....25Reference Value ......................................................25Fail Safe ..................................................................26DTC Index ...............................................................26Wiring Diagram - SEAT BELT CONTROL SYS-TEM - .......................................................................27

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ..............................31

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT DOES NOT OPER-ATE ....................................................................31

BOTH SIDES ..............................................................31BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure ......................31

SBC-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 31DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 31

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 31PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 31

PRECAUTION ............................................. 33

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 33Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ................................................................. 33Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................. 33Precaution for Battery Service ................................ 34

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 35

PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSTIC ............ 35Description .............................................................. 35

BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR ................. 36Exploded View ........................................................ 36Removal and Installation ......................................... 36

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT ..... 37Exploded View ........................................................ 37Removal and Installation ......................................... 37


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P

< BASIC INSPECTION >

S

BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

Work Flow INFOID:0000000004672943

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYSTEM

Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-tion occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicles in.

>> GO TO 2.

2.STUDY AND UNDERSTAND THE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Understand the operation condition or non-operation condition of pre-crash seat belt. Refer to SBC-6, "SystemDescription".

>> GO TO 3.

JMHIA0973GB


3.CHECK DTC

Perform "Self-diagnosis procedure" of appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and then check the diagnosis results in real time on“DATA MONITOR (AUTO RECORD)”.There is no priority for each DTC. Record them based on the following rules.Current malfunction: Record all DTCs detected.Past malfunction: Record up to 5 DTCs. When the 6th DTC is detected, it is overwritten to the last recordedDTC.Is DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Follow the diagnosis simulation test to check. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

4.PERFORM PRELIMINARY CHECK

Perform preliminary check. Refer to SBC-31, "BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure".

>> GO TO 5.

5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Identify the malfunctioning system with "Malfunctioning system by symptom diagnosis". Refer to SBC-31,"BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure".

With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6.Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7 (Parts system).Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 8 (Power supply, ground system).

6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE"

Perform the inspection with "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" of the applicable system.

>> GO TO 7.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Identify the malfunctioning part with "Diagnosis Procedure".Are malfunctioning parts detected?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> GO TO 9.

8.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Identify the malfunctioning part with "Component Function Check".Are malfunctioning parts detected?YES >> GO TO 10.NO >> GO TO 9.

9.PERFORM COMPONENT INSPECTION

Perform the inspection with "Component Inspection".

>> GO TO 10.

10.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.After repairing or replacing, reconnect parts or connector disconnected in "Diagnosis Procedure", and thenerase DTC if necessary. Refer to SBC-9, "CONSULT-III Function".

>> GO TO 11.

11.FINAL CHECK

Perform "CONSULT-lll function" again to check that the repair is performed correctly.



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,referring to the symptom inspection result in step 4.Are all malfunctions corrected?YES >> • Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, check that that DTC is erased.

• INSPECTION ENDNO >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 6.


PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONPRE-CRASH SEAT BELT SYSTEM

System Diagram INFOID:0000000004672948

System Description INFOID:0000000004673712

• Pre-crash seat belt is adopted to RH/LH seat belts• Pre-crush seat belt retracts shoulder webbing by a motor in pre-tensioner seat belt with control unit built in

motor• Facilitates an emergency operation by restraining change in occupant posture while emergency braking is

being applied, intelligent brake is being activated• Restrains occupant faster and firmly, maximizes the effect of other devices like air bag, and reduces possible

damage if a collision is unavoidable• Provides occupant a sense of ease by pulling occupants body to seat during braking that does not result a

collision• Retracts shoulder webbing and rewinds excessive seat belt slack when occupant is getting in or out of the

vehicle, or fastening or unfastening seat belt

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONPre-crush seat belt is activated in the conditions as per the following.Emergency braking is applied

OPERATION CONDITIONThe activation and deactivation conditions of pre-crush seat belt are as per the following.

OPERATION PROHIBITION CONDITION• Seat belt is not fastened (Only the seat belt that is not fastened does not operate)• At fail-safe condition

JMHIA0430GB

Activating condition Deactivating condition

When emergency braking is applied• Judges that emergency braking is applied• Vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 MPH) or more

• When the vehicle accelerates• The vehicle stays stopped



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004672950

Component Description INFOID:0000000004672951

1. Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) B213

2. Pre-crash seat belt control unit M110 3. Brake pedal stroke sensor E116

4. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) B13

A. Behind the glove box B. Behind the driver instrument panel (lower)

JMHIA0969ZZ

Component Function

Pre-crash seat belt control unit It controls pre-crash seat belt motor according to input signal.

Pre-crash seat belt motor(Seat belt motor [RH/LH])

It is built into seat belt retractor, and it pulls, returns, and maintains according to the motor rotation.

Brake pedal stroke sensor

• It changes voltage according to brake pedal depressed amount and sends the signal to pre-crash seat belt control unit.

• There are 2 signals (brake pedal stroke sensor 1 and 2) sent from the brake pedal stroke sensor. Pre-crash seat belt control unit will judge the stroke amount and the speed of the brake pedal according to the voltage of the signal sent by each side.


Seat belt buckle switchIt is arranged in the seat belt buckle and judges whether the seat belt is fastened or not fastened.

Unified meter and A/C ampIt transmits the vehicle status to pre-crash seat belt control unit using the CAN communication system.

Component Function


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT)

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT)

CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000004672953

Diagnosis for pre-crash seat belt system can be performed using CONSULT-III.

APPLICATION ITEM

SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTSCAUTION:When malfunctions are detected in several systems, including the CAN communication [U1000], trou-bleshoot the CAN communication [U1000].

NOTE:Timing display judges the status of self-diagnosis results judged from each input signal.• When malfunction is found in the past and it is normal now, “MEMORY” is displayed.• When malfunction is found at present or found immediately after the self-diagnosis, “CURRENT” is dis-

played.• When malfunction is not found in the past and it is normal now, nothing is displayed.CAUTION:Some malfunctions are displayed at low battery voltage (when keeping 7 to 8 V for 2 seconds) even ifthe system is not malfunctioning. Erase DTC memory and do not replace any parts after making surethat the system is normal especially if the malfunctions are displayed after replacing battery.

DATA MONITOR

Part to be diagnosed Diagnosis Mode Function description

Pre-crash seat belt

Self-diagnosis Results

• Displays data recorded when a malfunction is de-tected.

• Can print out the display.• Erases DTC recorded in memory.

Data MonitorDisplays input data for pre-crash seat belt control unit in real time.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTRMonitors communication status of CAN communi-cation.

ECU PART NUMBERDisplays pre-crash seat belt control unit part num-ber.

Diagnostic item Malfunction judgement criteria Refer to

CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] CAN communication is malfunctioning. SBC-10

Seat belt motor system RH [B2451] Circuit of seat belt motor (RH) is open or shorted. SBC-11

Seat belt motor system LH [B2452] Circuit of seat belt motor (LH) is open or shorted. SBC-13

B-pedal sensor system [B2453] Circuit of brake pedal stroke sensor is open or shorted. SBC-15

Motor power supply circuit system [B2454]

Circuit of motor power supply is open or shorted.CAUTION:Malfunction is judged when 30A (F/L-G) fusible link blows out even if motor power supply circuit is not malfunctioning.

SBC-18

Monitor item [Operation or unit] Display item

B PEDAL SIG1 [V] Brake pedal stroke sensor 1 signal voltage is displayed.

B PEDAL SIG2 [V] Brake pedal stroke sensor 2 signal voltage is displayed.

SB SW RH SIG [ON/OFF] ON/OFF status of RH seat belt switch signal is displayed.

SB SW LH SIG [ON/OFF] ON/OFF status of LH seat belt switch signal is displayed.

Vehicle speed sensor [km/h] Vehicle speed signal is displayed.


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISU1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

Description INFOID:0000000004679398

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modernvehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links withother control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connectedwith 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with lesswiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004679399

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004679400

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result”.Is DTC “U1000” displayed?YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

DTCCONSULT-III display

descriptionDTC Detection Condition Possible cause

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITWhen BCM cannot communicate CAN com-munication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more.

CAN communication system


B2451 SB MOTOR RH CIRC

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S



• It pulls, returns, and maintains according to the motor rotation.• It is built into the seat belt retractor.• It is installed to back of RH center pillar garnish.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR RH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.Is DTC detected?YES >> Refer to SBC-11, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Pre-crash seat belt motor RH system is normal.


1.CHECK PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR RH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and pre-crash seat belt motor RH connector.3. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and pre-crash seat belt

motor RH harness connector.

4. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR RH CIRCUIT

1. Replace pre-crash seat belt motor RH.2. Connect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and pre-crash seat belt motor RH connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.Is DTC detected?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit.

DTC No. Self-diagnosis item DTC Detection Condition Possible causes

B2451Seat belt motor system RH

Circuit of seat belt motor (RH) is open or shorted

• Open circuit, short circuit to battery, and short circuit to ground in seat belt motor (RH) harness

• Pre-crash seat belt control unit

Pre-crash seat belt control unit Pre-crash seat belt motor RHContinuity

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

M1101

B2281

Existed3 2

Pre-crash seat belt control unit

Ground

Continuity Connector Terminal

M1101

Not existed3


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> INSPECTION END

B2452 SB MOTOR LH CIRC

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S



• It pulls, returns, and maintains according to the motor rotation.• It is built into the seat belt retractor.• It is installed to the back of LH center pillar garnish.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE

1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR LH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.Is DTC detected?YES >> Refer to SBC-13, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> Pre-crash seat belt motor LH system is normal.


1.CHECK PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR LH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and pre-crash seat belt motor LH connector.3. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and pre-crash seat belt

motor LH harness connector.



2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR LH CIRCUIT

1. Replace pre-crash seat belt motor LH.2. Connect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and pre-crash seat belt motor LH connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.Is DTC detected?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit.


B2452 Seat belt motor system LHCircuit of seat belt motor (LH) is open or shorted

• Open circuit, short circuit to bat-tery, and short circuit to ground in seat belt motor (LH) harness


Pre-crash seat belt control unit Pre-crash seat belt motor LHContinuity


M1104

B282

Existed6 1


Ground


M1104

Not existed6


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> INSPECTION END

B2453 BR STROKE SEN CIRC

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S



• It changes voltage according to brake pedal depressed amount and sends the signal to pre-crash seat beltcontrol unit.

• There are 2 signals (brake pedal stroke sensor 1 and 2) sent from the brake pedal stroke sensor. Pre-crashseat belt control unit judges the stroke amount and the speed of the brake pedal according to the voltage ofthe signal sent by each side.

• It is installed to back of driver instrument panel (lower).


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.Is DTC detected?YES >> Refer to SBC-15, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “B PEDAL SIG1” and “B PEDAL SIG2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check “B PEDAL SIG1” and “B PEDAL SIG2” indication under the following conditions.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect brake pedal stroke sensor connector.3. Check voltage between brake pedal stroke sensor harness connector and ground.



B2453BR STROKE SEN

CIRCCircuit of brake pedal stroke sensor output is open or shorted

• Open circuit, short circuit to battery, and short circuit to ground in brake pedal stroke sensor harness

• Pre-crash seat belt control unit• Brake pedal stroke sensor

Monitor item ConditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)

B PEDAL SIG1Brake released → depressed

1 → 4

B PEDAL SIG2 4 → 1

Brake pedal stroke sensor

Ground

Voltage (V)(Approx.)Connector Terminal

E116 2 5


3.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector.2. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and brake pedal stroke sen-

sor harness connector.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Refer to SBC-16, "Component Inspection".NO >> Repair or replace harness between pre-crash seat belt control unit and brake pedal stroke sensor.

4.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector.2. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and brake pedal stroke sen-

sor harness connector.

3. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer to SBC-37, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness between pre-crash seat belt control unit and brake pedal stroke sensor.

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004673918

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect brake pedal stroke sensor connector.3. Check that continuity between brake pedal stroke sensor when performing the brake operation.

Pre-crash seat belt control unit Brake pedal stroke sensorContinuity


M110

16

E116

1

Existed20 3

21 4


Ground

ContinuityConnector Terminal

M110

16

Not existed20

21

Pre-crash seat belt control unit Brake pedal stroke sensorContinuity


M110 18 E116 2 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M110 18 Not existed



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Brake pedal stroke sensor system is normal.NO >> Replace brake pedal stroke sensor. Refer to SBC-36, "Removal and Installation".

Brake pedal stroke sensorCondition

Resistance (KΩ)(Approx.)Terminal

21

Brake released → depressed1.0 → 0.2

3 0.2 → 1.0


B2454 MOTOR PWR SUP CIRC
B2454 MOTOR PWR SUP CIRC


• When control unit activates pre-crush seat belt system, it retracts the shoulder belt with the electric motorand reduces seat belt slack.

• Power supply is supplied constantly from battery power supply.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC





1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is

blown.

2.CHECK PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector.3. Check voltage between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer toSBC-37, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness between pre-crash seat belt control unit and fusible link.


B2454SEAT BLT PWR DR CIRC

Motor power supply circuit is open or shorted

• Open circuit and short circuit to ground in drive circuit power supply harness


Terminal No. Signal name Fuse and fusible link No.

2 Battery power supply G


Ground

Voltage (V)(Approx.)

Connector TerminalBattery voltage

M110 2


B2455 PSB C/U INT CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

B2455 PSB C/U INT CIRCUIT


• It controls pre-crash seat belt motor according to input signal.• It consists of pre-crash seat belt control unit.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC





1..INSPECTION START

1. Check “Self-diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III.2. Touch “ERASE”.3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.

See SBC-19, "DTC Logic".Is DTC B2455 displayed again?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer toSBC-37, "Removal and Installation".NO >> GO TO 2.



>> INSPECTION END


B2455 C/U internal circuit system Pre-crash seat belt control unit internal circuit malfunction Pre-crash seat belt control unit


SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCHDRIVER SIDE

DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000004673927

• Performs the control of tension reducer according to the seat belt buckle switch ON/OFF.• Detects whether or not the seat belt is fastened when the ignition switch turns ON. If the seat belt is not fas-

tened, illuminates the seat belt warning lamp on the combination meter.• The seat belt buckle switch is installed in the seat belt buckle.

DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004673928


With CONSULT-IIIWhen checking “SB SW LH SIG” on DATA MONITOR screen, check that ON/OFF display changes synchro-nized with the insertion operation to the seat belt buckle.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to SBC-20, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004673929


Check that voltage between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) circuit is normal.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector.3. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit and seat belt buckle switch (driver side).


Is the inspection result normal?

Monitor item Condition

SB SW LH SIGWhen driver side seat belt is not fastened: OFF

When driver side seat belt is fastened: ON

(+)

(–) ConditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)

Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)

Connector Terminal

B13 1 Ground

When driver side seat belt is not fastened

5

When driver side seat belt is fastened

0

Pre-crash seat belt control unit Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)Continuity


M110 10 B13 1 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M110 10 Not existed



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness between pre-crash seat belt control unit and seat belt buckle switch

(driver side).

3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace harness between seat belt buckle switch and ground.

4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)

Check seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to SBC-21, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer to SBC-37, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (driver side).

DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004673930


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch connector.3. Check continuity of seat belt buckle (driver side).

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (driver side).

PASSENGER SIDE

PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000004673931

• Performs the control of tension reducer according to the seat belt buckle switch ON/OFF.• Detects whether or not the seat belt is fastened when the ignition switch turns ON. If the seat belt switch is

not fastened, illuminates the seat belt warning lamp on the combination meter.• The seat belt buckle switch is installed in the seat belt buckle.

PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004673932


With CONSULT-IIIWhen checking “SB SW RH SIG” on DATA MONITOR screen, check that ON/OFF display changes are syn-chronized with the insertion operation to the seat belt buckle.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) circuit is normal.


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B13 2 Existed

Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)Condition Continuity

Terminal

1 2When driver side seat belt is not fastened Not existed

When driver side seat belt is fastened Existed


SB SW RH SIGWhen driver side seat belt is not fastened: OFF

When driver side seat belt is fastened: ON


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> Refer to SBC-22, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004673933


Check that voltage between seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) circuit is normal.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE (PASSENGER SIDE) SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) con-

nector.3. Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit and seat belt buckle switch (passenger side).


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness between pre-crash seat belt control unit and seat belt buckle switch

(passenger side).

3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace harness between seat belt buckle switch and ground.

4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)

Check seat belt buckle switch (passenger side). Refer to SBC-23, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspec-tion".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer to SBC-37, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (passenger side).

(+)


Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)

Connector Terminal

B213 1 Ground

When driver side seat belt is not fastened

5

When driver side seat belt is fastened

0

Pre-crash seat belt control unit Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)Continuity


M110 8 B213 1 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M110 8 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B213 2 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004673934


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch connector.3. Check continuity of seat belt buckle (passenger side).

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (passenger side).

Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)Condition Continuity

Terminal

1 2When driver side seat belt is not fastened Not existed

When driver side seat belt is fastened Existed


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT




Is the fuse blown?YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is

blown.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect pre-crash seat belt control unit connectors.3. Check voltage between harness pre-crash seat belt control unit connector and ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector and ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair or replace harness.


13 Battery power supply 1


Ground

Voltage (V)(Approx.)Connector Terminal

M110 13 Battery voltage


Ground


M1105

Existed26


PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

S

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONPRE-CRASH SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT

Reference Value INFOID:0000000004673006

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOLCONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

Monitor item ConditionValue/Status

(Approx.)

B PEDAL SIG1B PEDAL SIG2

Brake releasedBrake released

(1 V)(4 V)

B PEDAL SIG1B PEDAL SIG2

Brake released → depressedBrake released → depressed

(1V→4 V)(4V→1 V)

SB SW RH SIGRH seat belt is not fastenedRH seat belt is fastened

OFFON

SB SW LH SIGLH seat belt is not fastenedLH seat belt is fastened

OFFON

JMHIA0181ZZ

Terminal No.(Wire color)

Description

ConditionValue (*1)(Approx.)

+ – Signal nameInput/Output

1(G/R)

Ground RH seat belt motor release signal Output — —

2(W)

Ground Drive circuit power supply (+BAT) Input Seat belt motor non-operational Battery voltage

3(G/Y)

GroundRH seat belt motor forward (retract) sig-nal

Output — —

4(GR/W)

GroundLH seat belt motor forward (retract) sig-nal

Output — —

5(W)

Ground Drive circuit ground — — 0

6(LY)

Ground LH seat belt motor release signal Output — —

7(G)

Ground Indicator (seat belt warning lamp) Output

LH seat belt is not fastened Ground

LH seat belt is fastened Battery voltage

LH seat belt is fastened or malfunction of system

Battery voltage ←→ Ground

8(LG)

Ground RH seat belt buckle switch signal InputRH seat belt is fastened Battery voltage

RH seat belt is not fastened Ground


*1: Perform the measurement while connecting the control unit and the harness.

Fail Safe INFOID:0000000004673003

When a malfunction occurs in the following system, the pre-crash seat belt function is controlled according tothe malfunctioning parts.

DTC Index INFOID:0000000004673004

10(SB)

Ground LH seat belt buckle switch signal InputLH seat belt is fastened Battery voltage

LH seat belt is not fastened Ground

13(W)

Ground Control circuit power supply (IGN) InputIGN ON Battery voltage

IGN OFF Ground

16(W)

Ground Brake pedal stroke sensor signal1 InputBrake released → depressed 1 V → 4 V

IGN OFF 1 V → 4 V

18(R)

Ground Brake pedal stroke sensor power circuit OutputIGN ON 1 V → 4 V

IGN OFF 1 V → 4 V

20(G)

GroundBrake pedal stroke sensor signal2

InputBrake released → depressed 1 V → 4 V

IGN OFF 0V

21(B)

Ground Brake pedal stroke sensor ground circuit — — Ground

22(P)

Ground CAN communication signal (CAN L-line)Input/Output

— —

24(L)

Ground CAN communication signal (CAN H-line)Input/Output

— —

25 Ground Shield ground — — Ground

26(B)

Ground Control circuit ground — — Ground


Description

ConditionValue (*1)(Approx.)


Display contents of CONSULT-III Fail-safe Cancellation

B2451: SB MOTOR RH CIRC Deactivate the RH pre-crash seat belt function Erase DTC

B2452: SB MOTOR LH CIRC Deactivate the LH pre-crash seat belt function Erace DTC

B2453: BR STROK SEN CIRC Deactivate the interlock function during emergency brake operation

Erace DTC

B2454: MOTOR PWR SUP CIRC Deactivate the pre-crash seat belt function Erace DTC

DTCTrouble diagnosis name(CONSULT-III display)

DTC detection condition Reference

— — No malfunction is detected —

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITPre-crash seat belt control unit cannot transmit and receive CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more

SBC-10

B2451 SB MOTOR RH CIRC RH seat belt motor circuit is shorted or open SBC-11

B2452 SB MOTOR LH CIRC LH seat belt motor circuit is shorted or open SBC-13

B2453 BR STROK SEN CIRC Brake pedal stroke sensor circuit is shorted or open SBC-15

B2454 MOTOR PWR SUP CIRC Motor power supply circuit is shorted or open SBC-18

B2455 PSB C/U INT CIRCUIT Internal breakdown in pre-crash seat belt control unit SBC-19



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

Wiring Diagram - SEAT BELT CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004673005

JCHWM0336GB


JCHWM0337GB



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S

JCHWM0338GB


JCHWM0339GB


PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

S

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISPRE-CRASH SEAT BELT DOES NOT OPERATEBOTH SIDES

BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004673940

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to SBC-24, "Diagnosis Procedure"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.

DRIVER SIDE



Check seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to SBC-20, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE



Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to SBC-24, "Diagnosis Procedure"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check seat belt buckle switch (passenger side). Refer to SBC-21, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component FunctionCheck"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".


PRE-CRASH SEAT BELT DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >NO >> GO TO 1.

PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

S

PRECAUTIONPRECAUTIONS

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004672989

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used alongwith a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certaintypes of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRSsystem uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one frontair bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of thisService Manual.WARNING:• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in

the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed byan authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.

• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personalinjury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air BagModule, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.

• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in thisService Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-ness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERSWARNING:• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the

ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possiblycausing serious injury.

• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect thebattery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Seat Belt Service INFOID:0000000004672990

CAUTION:• Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the

both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.• Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.• After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt pre-

tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRC-14, "Diagnosis Description".• Do not use disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.• Never oil tongue and buckle.• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt

assembly.• If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.

AFTER A COLLISIONWARNING:Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the col-lision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do socould result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a colli-sion should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensionershould be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bagsare deployed.Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).• The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage

or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in

which the air bags are deployed.

Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000004672991

Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, thewindow slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automaticwindow function will not work with the battery disconnected.


PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSTIC

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

S

PERIODIC MAINTENANCEPRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSTIC


WARNING:• The following tests should be performed in a safe, open place that is free of traffic and obstacles.• The tests should be performed on a dry, paved road. Never attempt to perform the tests on a wet or

unpaved road, open road, or highway. (This may cause an accident or personal injury.)• Driver and passenger should assume seat belt may operate and prepare themselves accordingly.1. Fasten driver and passenger seat belts.2. Drive at approximately 25 km/h (16 MPH).3. Notify passenger of a sudden stop. Driver and passenger prepare themselves for the possibility of system

not operating. Then, driver fully depresses the brake pedal to stop suddenly.4. Check that the shoulder of the seat belt is pulled while braking.


BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR
BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR

Exploded View INFOID:0000000004672992

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004672993

REMOVAL1. Remove the driver instrument panel (lower). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor connector (A).3. Remove the screws.4. Remove the brake pedal stroke sensor (1).

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.

1. Brake pedal stroke sensor A. Brake pedal stroke sensor connector

JMHIA0100ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

BC

N

O

P


S




REMOVAL1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Disconnect the pre-crash seat belt control unit connector (A).3. Remove the screws.4. Remove the pre-crash seat belt control unit (1).


1. Pre-crash seat belt control unit A. Pre-crash seat belt control unit con-nector

JMHIA0099ZZ


BODY INTERIOR

C

D

E

SECTION SEA

B

SEAT

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

E

N

O

P

CONTENTS

S



INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ..................... 8

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .....................................8

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ......8ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re-pair Requirement .......................................................8

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT ..........................................................8

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description ..................................8ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .......8

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ..........................................8SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description ...................8SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Re-quirement ..................................................................8


POWER SEAT FOR DRIVER SIDE .................... 9

POWER SEAT FUNCTION .........................................9POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Diagram .........9POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Description ......9POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ...................................................................10POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Description ..........................................11

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION ..................................11POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram ....11POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Descrip-tion ..........................................................................11

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ..........................................................14POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description ..........................................14

POWER SEAT FOR PASSENGER SIDE .........16

POWER SEAT FUNCTION ........................................16POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Diagram .......16POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Description ....16POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ...................................................................17POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Descrip-tion ...........................................................................18

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION ..................................18POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram ....18POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Descrip-tion ...........................................................................18POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location ..........................................................21POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description ..........................................21

SIDE SUPPORT UNIT .......................................23System Description ..................................................23Component Parts Location ......................................23Component Description ...........................................23

HEATED SEAT .................................................24System Diagram ......................................................24System Description ..................................................24Component Parts Location ......................................25Component Description ...........................................25

LUMBAR SUPPORT .........................................26System Description ..................................................26Component Parts Location ......................................26Component Description ...........................................26

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT C/U) ....27Diagnosis Description ..............................................27

SE-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

CONSULT-III Function ........................................... 27

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 30

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 30Description .............................................................. 30DTC Logic ............................................................... 30Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 30Special Repair Requirement ................................... 30

B2112 SLIDING MOTOR ................................... 31Description .............................................................. 31DTC Logic ............................................................... 31Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 31

B2113 RECLINING MOTOR .............................. 33Description .............................................................. 33DTC Logic ............................................................... 33Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 33

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 35

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .............................. 35DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 35

PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ..................... 35PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 35

HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT ............................. 36HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-cedure ..................................................................... 36

HEATED SEAT SWITCH .......................................... 38HEATED SEAT SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ... 38

SLIDING SWITCH .............................................. 41

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 41DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 41DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 41DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 41DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................. 42

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 42PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 42PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................. 42PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 43PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ......... 44

SEATBACK ............................................................... 44SEATBACK : Description ....................................... 44SEATBACK : Component Function Check ............. 44SEATBACK : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 44SEATBACK : Component Inspection ..................... 46

RECLINING SWITCH ........................................ 47

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 47DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 47DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 47

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 47DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................. 48

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 48PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 48PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check .................................. 48PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 49PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ......... 50

LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) .............................. 51

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 51DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 51DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 51DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 51DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................. 52


LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) ................................ 55



POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ... 59

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 59DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 59

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 59PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 59

FORWARD SWITCH ......................................... 61


PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 62PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 62PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

... 62PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 63PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ......... 64


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P

S

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH .........................65

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................65DRIVER SIDE : Description ....................................65DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........65DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ....................65DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ..................66

PASSENGER SIDE ...................................................66PASSENGER SIDE : Description ...........................66PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

....66PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...........67PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection .........68

SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH ....................................69




POWER WALK-IN SWITCH ...............................73




DOOR SWITCH ..................................................77Description ..............................................................77Component Function Check ....................................77Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................77

SLIDING SENSOR .............................................79

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................79DRIVER SIDE : Description ....................................79DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........79DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ....................79


....81PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...........81

SLIDING MOTOR ..............................................84

DRIVER SIDE .............................................................84DRIVER SIDE : Description .....................................84DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........84DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ....................84DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ...................85

PASSENGER SIDE ....................................................85PASSENGER SIDE : Description ............................85PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ..................................85PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............86PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ..........87

RECLINING MOTOR .........................................88




LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ...............................92




LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) .................................96




HEATED SEAT SWITCH ................................ 100

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................100


DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................100DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......100DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................100DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................101

PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................101PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................101PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................101PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........102PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........103

HEATED SEAT RELAY ................................... 104Description .............................................................104Component Function Check ..................................104Diagnosis Procedure .............................................104Component Inspection ...........................................105

HEAT SENSOR ............................................... 106

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................106DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................106DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........106DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................106DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................107

PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................108PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................108PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

..108PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........108PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........110

SEAT CUSHION HEATER .............................. 111

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................111DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................111DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......111DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................111DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................112

PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................112PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................112PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................112PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........112PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........114

SEATBACK HEATER ...................................... 115

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................115DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................115DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......115DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................115

PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................115PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................115PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................115PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........115

HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR ............ 117

DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 117DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 117DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 117DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 117

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 117PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 117PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................ 117PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 117

LUMBAR SUPPORT ........................................119Wiring Diagram - LUMBAR SUPPORT - .............. 119

SIDE SUPPORT ...............................................122Wiring Diagram - SIDE SUPPORT - ..................... 122

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............125

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) ................125

Reference Value ................................................... 125Wiring Diagram - POWER SEAT SYSTEM FOR DRIVER SIDE (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) - .................................................... 127Fail-Safe ................................................................ 133DTC Index ............................................................ 134

PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .............136Reference Value ................................................... 136Wiring Diagram - POWER SEAT SYSTEM FOR PASSENGER SIDE - ............................................ 139

HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT .....................145Reference Value ................................................... 145Wiring Diagram - HEATED SEAT SYSTEM (WITH M/T) - .................................................................... 146Wiring Diagram - HEATED SEAT SYSTEM (WITH A/T) - ..................................................................... 150

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ...........................154

ALL COMPONENTS OF POWER SEAT DO NOT OPERATE ................................................154

DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 154DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 154

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 154PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 154

POWER SEAT SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) DOES NOT OPERATE ANY COMPONENTS ..155

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155

SLIDING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ..156




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P

S

RECLINING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-ATE ................................................................... 158



LIFTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .. 160

FRONT ..................................................................... 160FRONT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 160

REAR ....................................................................... 160REAR : Diagnosis Procedure ................................ 160

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ......................................................... 162



HEATED SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE .......... 165

BOTH SIDES ........................................................... 165BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 165



SEATBACK HEATER ONLY DOES NOT OP-ERATE .............................................................. 167



CANNOT ADJUST HEATED SEAT TEMPER-ATURE .............................................................. 168



HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON ................................................. 169



SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-NOSES ............................................................ 170

Work Flow ..............................................................170Inspection Procedure .............................................172Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................174

PRECAUTION ............................................ 176

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 176Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...............................................................176Precaution for Battery Service ...............................176Service Notice .......................................................176Precaution for Work ...............................................176

PREPARATION ......................................... 178

PREPARATION ............................................... 178Special Service Tool ..............................................178Commercial Service Tool ......................................178

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 179

FRONT SEAT .................................................. 179Exploded View .......................................................179Removal and Installation .......................................182Disassembly and Assembly ...................................183

REAR SEAT .................................................... 192Exploded View .......................................................192Removal and Installation .......................................192Disassembly and Assembly ...................................193

SEATBACK CONTROL CABLE ..................... 195Exploded View .......................................................195Removal and Installation .......................................195

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .................... 196Exploded View .......................................................196Removal and Installation .......................................196

PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ........... 197Exploded View .......................................................197Removal and Installation .......................................197

HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT ................... 198Exploded View .......................................................198Removal and Installation .......................................198

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CON-TROL UNIT ...................................................... 199

Exploded View .......................................................199Removal and Installation .......................................199

POWER SEAT SWITCH ................................. 200Removal and Installation .......................................200

SLIDING SWITCH ........................................... 201

SEATBACK ..............................................................201SEATBACK : Removal and Installation .................201


SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH ............................... 202Removal and Installation .......................................202

LUMBAR SUPPORT SWITCH ........................ 203Removal and Installation .......................................203

HEATED SEAT SWITCH ..................................204Exploded View ...................................................... 204Removal and Installation ....................................... 204



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



DETAILED FLOW

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-tion occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.

>> GO TO 2.

2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION

Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.

>> GO TO 3.

3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”

Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2 and then identify where to start per-forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.

>> GO TO 4.

4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS”

Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system.

>> GO TO 5.

5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 6.

6.FINAL CHECK

Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2.Are the malfunctions corrected?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 3.


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-scription INFOID:0000000004250014

Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is removed, driver seat control unit or passenger seat controlunit is replaced.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004250015

1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

Perform system initialization. Refer to SE-8, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description".

>> Work end.ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : DescriptionINFOID:0000000004250016

Initial setting is necessary when battery terminal is removed, driver seat control unit or passenger seat controlunit is replaced.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-quirement INFOID:0000000004250017

1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

Perform system initialization. Refer to SE-8, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description".

>> Work end.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Description INFOID:0000000004250018

Always perform the initialization when the battery terminal is removed, driver seat control unit or passengerseat control unit is replaced. If the initialization is not performed, power walk-in function does not operation.

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004250019

INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

1. STEP-1

Slide the seat to the front edge.NOTE:If seat sliding position is already at the front edge, slide the seat backward once it to the front edge again.

>> Work end.


POWER SEAT FOR DRIVER SIDE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONPOWER SEAT FOR DRIVER SIDEPOWER SEAT FUNCTION

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004543873

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000004543874

• Power seat is operative regardless of the ignition switch position because power supply is always suppliedto driver seat control unit.

• Driver seat control unit detects each power seat switch operation and operates applicable motor.

SLIDING OPERATIONWhen operating the sliding switch located in power seat switch, sliding motor operates and adjusts the frontand back position of the seat.

RECLINING OPERATIONWhen operating the reclining switch located in power seat switch, reclining motor operates and adjusts the for-ward and backward position of the seatback. However, the reclining function does not operate when the for-ward switch is in the ON position.

LIFTING OPERATIONWhen operating the lifting switch located in power seat switch, lifting motor operates and adjusts the up anddown position of the seat cushion (front and rear).

SLEEP MODE• The driver seat control unit is equipped with the sleep mode to reduce the electric power consumption.• The sleep mode is activated when all of the following conditions are satisfied.1. Ignition switch turns OFF (steering LOCK position).2. When no power seat motors are moving.3. Power walk-in switch turns OFF.

WAKE-UP MODEThe sleep mode is cancelled when any status change is detected in the following items.1. CAN communication.2. Power seat switch.3. Power walk-in switch.

JMJIA2468GB


POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004543875

1. BCM M122, M123 2. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) B13

3. Power walk-in switch B513

4. Reclining switch (power seat switch) B511

5. Sliding, lifting switch (power seat switch) B511

6. Reclining motor B524

7. Driver seat control unit B503, B504 8. Sliding sensor B526 9. Lifting motor (front) B528

10. Sliding motor B525 11. Lifting motor (rear) B530 12. Forward switch B512

13. Sliding limit switch B514 14. Driver side door switch B16 15. Unified meter and A/C amp. M67

A. Dash side lower (passenger side) B. View with seat cushion pad and seat-back pad removed

C. View with back side of seat cushion

D. View with seatback pad removed E. View with seat cushion pad removed F. Behind cluster lid C

JMJIA2469ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Description INFOID:0000000004543876

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004543877

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000004543878

OUTLINEAutomatically slides the driver seat by operating the power walk-in switch so as to easily allow entry to the rearseat.

Forward OperationSlides the driver seat to the front end position (sliding limit switch: ON) by operating the power walk-in switchwhen the seatback is folded down.The forward operation is stopped by folding the seatback (forward switch: OFF) during the forward operation.

Backward OperationThe seatback is folded up after performing the forward operation of power walk-in function. Slide the driverseat to the backward position before performing the forward operation again by operating the power walk-inswitch.If the sliding operation is performed after performing the forward operation, do not perform the backward oper-ation.

Item Function

Driver seat control unit Operates the specific seat motor with the signal from the power seat switch

Power seat switch Built-in reclining switch, sliding switch, and lifting switch

Reclining motorOperates forward and backward movement of seatback with the power supplied to driver seat con-trol unit.

Sliding motor Operates forward and backward slide of seat with the power supplied to driver seat control unit.

Lifting motor (front/rear)Operates up and down movement of seat cushion with the power supplied to driver seat control unit.

Forward switch Detect folded down or folded up of the seatback.

JMJIA2370GB


OPERATION PROCEDURE

Forward Operation

1. Open driver door.2. Pull the walk-in lever on the upper part of seatback, and then the seatback is folded down.3. Press the power walk-in switch.4. Slide the seat to the front end position.

Backward Operation

1. Fold up the seatback after performing the forward operation.2. Press the power walk-in switch.3. Slide the seat to the previous position before the forward operation is performed.

OPERATION CONDITIONPerform the power walk-in function when the following conditions are satisfied.

Forward Operation

Backward Operation

DETAIL FLOW

Forward Operation

Backward Operation

Item Request status

Driver side door Open

Driver side seat belt Not fastened

Power seat switch (sliding) Not operated

Vehicle speed 0 km/h

Seat position (sliding) Other than front end

Seatback Folded down

Item Request status

Initialize Done

Driver side seat belt Not fastened


Vehicle speed 0 km/h

Seat position (sliding)The seat sliding position does not move after per-

forming the forward operation.

Seatback Folded up

Order Inputs Outputs Control unit condition

1 Forward switch —Driver seat control unit detects that the seatback is folded down by the signal from the forward switch.

2 Power walk-in switch —The operation signal is input to the driver seat con-trol unit when the power walk-in switch is operated.

3 —Sliding motor(forward)

Driver seat control unit operates the seat sliding motor forward when it detects that the power walk-in switch is operated.

4 Sliding limit switch —Driver seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when it detects that the seat sliding reaches the front end position by the sliding limit switch.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SLEEP MODE• The driver seat control unit is equipped with the sleep mode to reduce the electric power consumption.• The sleep mode is activated when all of the following conditions are satisfied.1. Ignition switch turns OFF (steering LOCK position).2. When no power seat motors are moving.3. Power walk-in switch turns OFF.

WAKE-UP MODEThe sleep mode is cancelled when any status change is detected in the following items.1. CAN communication.2. Power seat switch.3. Power walk-in switch.


1 Forward switch —Driver seat control unit detects that the seatback is folded up by the signal from the forward switch.

2 Power walk-in switch —The operation signal is input to the driver seat con-trol unit when the power walk-in switch is operated.

3 —Sliding motor(backward)

Driver seat control unit operates the sliding motor backward when it detects that the power walk-in switch is operated.

4 Sliding sensor —

Driver seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when the seat sliding position reaches the front po-sition before performing the forward operation by the signal from sliding sensor.


POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004555012

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description INFOID:0000000004543880

CONTROL UNITS

1. BCM M122, M123 2. Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) B13

3. Power walk-in switch B513


5. Sliding, lifting switch (power seat switch) B511

6. Reclining motor B524

7. Driver seat control unit B503, B504 8. Sliding sensor B526 9. Lifting motor (front) B528

10. Sliding motor B525 11. Lifting motor (rear) B530 12. Forward switch B512

13. Sliding limit switch B514 14. Driver side door switch B16 15. Unified meter and A/C amp. M67

A. Dash side lower (passenger side) B. View with seat cushion pad and seat-back pad removed

C. View with back side of seat cushion

D. View with seatback pad removed E. View with seat cushion pad removed F. Behind cluster lid C

JMJIA2469ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

INPUT PARTS

Switches

Sensors

OUTPUT PARTS

Item Function

Driver seat control unit• Main units of power walk-in function• It is connected to the CAN.

BCM

Transmits the following statuses to the driver seat control unit via CAN communica-tion.• Driver side door: OPEN/CLOSE• Starter: CRANKING/OTHER

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the driver seat control unit via CAN commu-nication.

Item Function

Driver side door switch Detects front door (driver side) open/close status.

Power walk-in switch Performs the power walk-in operation by operating the power walk-in switch.

Sliding limit switchDetects the front end position of seat sliding during the power walk-in function for-ward operation.

Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) Detects the seat belt (driver side) fastening/releasing condition.

Forward switchDetects the folded up/folded down condition of seatback that is the operation con-dition of power walk-in function.

Item Function

Sliding sensor Detects the forward/backward position of seat.

Item Function

Sliding motor Slides the seat forward/backward.


POWER SEAT FOR PASSENGER SIDE
POWER SEAT FOR PASSENGER SIDEPOWER SEAT FUNCTION

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004543881

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000004543882

• Power seat is operative regardless of the ignition switch position because power supply is always suppliedto passenger seat control unit.

• Passenger seat control unit detects each power seat switch operation and operates applicable motor.

SLIDING OPERATIONWhen operating the sliding switch located in power seat switch and sliding switch (seatback), sliding motoroperates and adjusts the front and back position of the seat.

RECLINING OPERATIONWhen operating the reclining switch located in power seat switch, reclining motor operates and adjusts the for-ward and backward position of the seatback. However, the reclining function does not operate when the for-ward switch is in the ON position.

LIFTING OPERATIONWhen operating the lifting switch located in power seat switch, lifting motor operates and adjusts the up anddown position of the seat cushion (front and rear).

SLEEP MODE• The passenger seat control unit is equipped with the sleep mode to reduce the electric power consumption.• The sleep mode is activated when all of the following conditions are satisfied.1. When no power seat motors are moving.2. Power walk-in switch turns OFF.

WAKE-UP MODEThe sleep mode is cancelled when any status change is detected in the following items.1. Power seat switch and sliding switch (seatback).2. Power walk-in switch.

JMJIA2371GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004543883

*: With 8-way power passenger's seat

1. BCM M118, M119, M123 2. Power walk-in switch B557 3. Sliding, lifting switch (power seat switch) B554


5. Sliding switch (seatback) B561 6. Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) B213

7. Forward switch B556 8. Reclining motor B566 9. Passenger side door switch B216

10. Sliding limit switch B558 11. Lifting motor (rear) B570* 12. Sliding motor B567

13. Lifting motor (front) B569* 14. Sliding sensor B568 15. Passenger seat control unit B552, B553

A. Dash side lower (passenger side) B. View with seatback pad removed C. View with seatback pad removed

D. Back side of seat cushion

JMJIA2470ZZ


POWER SEAT FUNCTION : Component Description INFOID:0000000004543884


POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004543885

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000004543886

OUTLINEAutomatically slides the passenger seat by operating the power walk-in switch so as to easily allow entry tothe rear seat.

Forward OperationSlides the driver seat to the front end position (sliding limit switch: ON) by operating the power walk-in switchwhen the seatback is folded down.The forward operation is stopped by folding the seatback (forward switch: OFF) during the forward operation.

Backward OperationThe seatback is folded up after performing the forward operation of power walk-in function. Slide the driverseat to the backward position before performing the forward operation again by operating the power walk-inswitch.If the manual operation, memory operation, and Intelligent Key interlock operation are performed after per-forming the forward operation, do not perform the backward operation.

OPERATION PROCEDURE

Item Function

BCM The power received from battery to passenger seat control unit is supplied at all times.

Passenger seat control unit Operates each motor with the signal from the power seat switch and sliding switch (seatback).

Power seat switchBuilt-in reclining switch, sliding switch, and lifting switch, transmits operation signal to passenger seat control unit.

Sliding switch (seatback) Transmits sliding operation signal to passenger seat control unit.

Reclining motorOperates forward and backward movement of seatback with the power supplied to passenger seat control unit.

Sliding motorOperates forward and backward slide of seat with the power supplied to passenger seat control unit.

Lifting motor (front/rear)*Operates up and down movement of seat cushion with the power supplied to passenger seat con-trol unit.

Forward switch Detect folded down or folded up of the seatback.

JMJIA2609GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Forward Operation

1. Open passenger door.2. Pull the walk-in lever on the upper part of seatback, and then the seatback folds down.3. Press the power walk-in switch.4. Slide the seat to the front end position.

Backward Operation

1. Fold up the seatback after performing the forward operation.2. Press the power walk-in switch.3. Slide the seat to the previous position before the forward operation* is performed.*: If the seat sliding position before starting the forward operation is more than 177.6 mm (6.992 in) from thefront end position, the maximum seat sliding is 177.6 mm (6.992 in).

OPERATION CONDITIONPerform the power walk-in function when the following conditions are satisfied.

Forward Operation

Backward Operation

DETAIL FLOW

Forward Operation

Backward Operation

Item Request status

Passenger side door Open

Passenger side seat belt Not fastened


Seat position (sliding) Other than front end

Seatback Folded down

Item Request status

Initialize Done

Passenger side seat belt Not fastened


Seat position (sliding)The seat sliding position does not move after per-

forming the forward operation.

Seatback Folded up


1 Forward switch —Passenger seat control unit detects that the seat-back is folded down by the signal from the forward switch.

2 Power walk-in switch —The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the power walk-in switch is oper-ated.

3 —Sliding motor(forward)

Passenger seat control unit operates the seat slid-ing motor forward when it detects that the power walk-in switch is operated.

4 Sliding limit switch —Passenger seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when it detects that the seat sliding reaches the front end position by the sliding limit switch.


SLEEP MODE• The passenger seat control unit is equipped with the sleep mode to reduce the electric power consumption.• The sleep mode is activated when all of the following conditions are satisfied.1. When no power seat motors are moving.2. Power walk-in switch turns OFF.

WAKE-UP MODEThe sleep mode is cancelled when any status change is detected in the following items.1. Power seat switch.2. Power walk-in switch.


1 Forward switch —Passenger seat control unit detects that the seat-back is folded up by the signal from the forward switch.

2 Power walk-in switch —The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the power walk-in switch is oper-ated.

3 —Sliding motor(backward)

Passenger seat control unit operates the sliding motor backward when it detects that the power walk-in switch is operated.

4 Sliding sensor —

Passenger seat control unit stops the seat sliding motor when the seat sliding position reaches the front position before performing the forward oper-ation by the signal from sliding sensor or when the seat sliding position is 177.6 mm (6.992 in) from the front end position.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004555013


POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : Component Description INFOID:0000000004543888

CONTROL UNITS

1. BCM M118, M119, M123 2. Power walk-in switch B557 3. Sliding, lifting switch (power seat switch) B554


5. Sliding switch (seatback) B561 6. Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) B213

7. Forward switch B556 8. Reclining motor B566 9. Passenger side door switch B216

10. Sliding limit switch B558 11. Lifting motor (rear) B570* 12. Sliding motor B567

13. Lifting motor (front) B569* 14. Sliding sensor B568 15. Passenger seat control unit B552, B553

A. Dash side lower (passenger side) B. View with seatback pad removed C. View with seatback pad removed

D. Back side of seat cushion

JMJIA2470ZZ


INPUT PARTS

Switches

Sensors

OUTPUT PARTS

Item Function

Passenger seat control unit Main unit of power walk-in function

Item Function

Passenger side door switch Detects front door (passenger side) open/close status.

Power walk-in switch Performs the power walk-in operation by operating the power walk-in switch.

Sliding limit switchDetects the front end position of seat sliding during the power walk-in function for-ward operation.

Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) Detects the seat belt (passenger side) fastening/releasing condition.

Forward switchDetects the folded up/folded down condition of seatback that is the operation con-dition of power walk-in function.

Item Function

Sliding sensor Detects the forward/backward position of seat.

Item Function

Sliding motor Slides the seat forward/backward.


SIDE SUPPORT UNIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SIDE SUPPORT UNIT


• While operating the side support switch, the pump located inside side support unit operates and adjust theair pressure in seat cushion and seatback side support.

• It is possible to soften the side support, by allowing some air to escape, by deflating the solenoid locatedinside side support.

• It is possible to adjust seat cushion and seatback differently while inflating or deflating solenoid located inside support unit.



JMJIA0945ZZ

1. Side support (seat cushion)(Side support unit B509)

2. Side support (seat back)(Side support unit B509)

3. Side support unit B509

4. Side support switch (seat back side)B508

5. Side support switch (cushion side)B508

A.View with seat cushion pad and seat back pad are removed.

Item Function

Side support switchWith a built-in cushion side and seat back side, controls the power supplied to pump and to each solenoid.

Side support unit Built-in pump, pump relay and solenoid, operates when pressing ON/OFF on side support switch.


HEATED SEAT
HEATED SEAT



• Heated seat is activated by heated seat switch while ignition switch is ON, and is equipped with the functionto warm seat cushion and seatback.

• Heated seat is equipped with the 6-stage temperature adjustment function that adjusts temperature by oper-ating heated seat switch to the optimal position.

• Heated seat is equipped with a thermostat in heater unit to prevent heater unit overheating.

OPERATION DESCRIPTION• When operating heated seat switch to any position between 1 and 6 while ignition switch is ON, indicator illu-

minates, heated seat control unit supplies power supply to heater unit, and warms seat cushion and seat-back.

• Heat sensor that is built in seat cushion heater detects seat cushion heater temperature and outputs toheated seat control unit.

• Heated seat control unit monitors the heated seat switch position and heater sensor temperature, and inter-rupts power supply to heater unit when the heat sensor temperature reaches preset temperature.

• Heated seat control unit adjusts temperature to preset temperature by supplying or interrupting power supplyto heater unit.

JMJIA2338GB


HEATED SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



1. Heated seat switch• Driver side

A/T M141M/T M175

• Passenger sideA/T M142M/T M176

2. Seatback heater• Driver side B542• Passenger side B582

3. Seat cushion heater• Driver side B517, B541• Passenger side B574, B581

4. Heated seat relay M70 5. Heated seat control unit• Driver side B518• Passenger side B575

A. Behind cluster lid C B. Backside of seat cushion

JMJIA2395ZZ

Item Function

Heated seat switch• Adjusts heated seat temperature and deactivates heated seat• Is equipped to indicator that indicates the operating condition

Seat cushion heater• Warms seat cushion• Contains heater sensor that outputs seat cushion temperature to heated seat control unit

Seatback heater Warms seatback

Heated seat control unitControls heated seat temperature and is independently placed in each seat cushion (driver seat and passenger seat)


LUMBAR SUPPORT
LUMBAR SUPPORT


• Lumbar support can operate regardless of the ignition switch position because battery power is supplied to itat all times.

• While operating the lumbar support switch, lumbar support motor operates which allows forward and back-ward operation of seatback support.



1. Lumbar support switch B505 2. Lumbar support motor B506

JMJIA0189ZZ

Item Function

Lumbar support switch Controls the power supplied to lumbar support motor.

Lumbar support motorWith the power supplied to lumbar support switch, operates the forward and backward movement of seatback support device.


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT C/U)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004250049

The power seat system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation with CONSULT-III.

DIAGNOSTIC MODE

CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000004250050

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTSRefer to ADP-162, "DTC Index".

DATA MONITOR

Diagnostic mode Description

SELF-DIAG RESULTS Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results.

DATA MONITORDisplays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat con-trol unit in real time.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.

ACTIVE TEST Drive each output device.

ECU PART NUMBER Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit parts.

Monitor Item UnitMain

Signals

Selection From Menu

Contents

SET SW “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal.

MEMORY SW 1 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 sig-nal.

MEMORY SW 2 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 sig-nal.

SLIDE SW–FR*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) sig-nal.

SLIDE SW–RR*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward) signal.

RECLN SW–FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward) signal.

RECLN SW–RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward) signal.

LIFT FR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (upward) signal.

LIFT FR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (down-ward) signal.

LIFT RR SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (upward) signal.

LIFT RR SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (down-ward) signal.

MIR CON SW–UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (upward) sig-nal.

MIR CON SW–DN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (downward) signal.

MIR CON SW–RH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (passenger side) signal.

MIR CON SW–LH “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (driver side) signal.


*1: M/T models display all item except this item.*2: A/T models display all item except this item.

*3: Only this item is displayed for driver seat without automatic drive positioner system.

MIR CHNG SW–R “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to right) signal.

MIR CHNG SW–L “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to left) signal.

TILT SW-UP “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the tilt switch (upward) signal.

TILT SW-DOWN “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the tilt switch (downward) sig-nal.

TELESCO SW-FR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the telescoping switch (for-ward) signal.

TELESCO SW-RR “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the telescoping switch (back-ward) signal.

FORWARD SW*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the forward switch signal.

WALK-IN SW*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the power walk-in switch sig-nal.

FWD LIMIT SW*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the sliding limit switch signal.

SEAT BELT SW*3 “ON/OFF” × × ON/OFF status judged from the seat belt backle switch sig-nal.

DETENT SW*1 “ON/OFF” × × The selector lever position “OFF (P position) / ON (other than P position)” judged from the detention switch signal.

PARK BRAKE SW*2 “ON/OFF” × × The parking brake condition “ON (applied) / OFF (release)” judged from the parking brake switch signal.

STARTER SW “ON/OFF” × × Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) sta-tus judged from the ignition switch signal.

SLIDE PULSE*3 – – ×Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases.

RECLN PULSE – – ×Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases.

LIFT FR PULSE – – ×Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the val-ue decreases.

LIFT RR PULSE – – ×Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the val-ue decreases.

MIR/SEN RH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) up-ward/downward is displayed.

MIR/SEN RH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) left-ward/rightward is displayed.

MIR/SEN LH U–D “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) upward/downward is displayed.

MIR/SEN LH R–L “V” – × Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) leftward/rightward is displayed.

TILT SEN “V” – × Voltage input from tilt sensor upward/downward is dis-played.

TELESCO SEN “V” – × Voltage input from telescopic sensor forward/backward is displayed.

Monitor Item UnitMain

Signals

Selection From Menu

Contents



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

ACTIVE TESTCAUTION:When driving vehicle, do not perform active test.

*: Driver seat without automatic driver position system display only “SEAT SLIDE”.

Test item Description

SEAT SLIDE* Activates/deactivates the sliding motor.

SEAT RECLINING Activates/deactivates the reclining motor.

SEAT LIFTER FR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front).

SEAT LIFTER RR Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear).

TILT MOTOR Activates/deactivates the tilt motor.

TELESCO MOTOR Activates/deactivates the telescopic motor.

MIRROR MOTOR RH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side).

MIRROR MOTOR LH Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side).

MEMORY SW INDCTR Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator.


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT


CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modernvehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links withother control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connectedwith 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.STEP 1

Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 3 seconds or more.

>> GO TO 2.

2.STEP 2

Check “Self Diagnostic Result” using CONSULT-III.Is the DTC detected?YES >> Perform diagnosis procedure. Refer to SE-30, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END


Refer to LAN-26, "Interview Sheet".

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004543896

Refer to SE-8, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".

DTCTrouble diagnosis

nameDTC detecting condition Possible cause

U1000CAN COMM CIR-CUIT

• Driver seat control unit cannot communicate to other control units.

• Driver seat control unit cannot communicate for more than the specified time.

Harness or connectors(CAN communication line is open or shorted)


B2112 SLIDING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

B2112 SLIDING MOTOR


• The sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame.• The sliding motor is activated via the driver seat control unit.• Slides the seat forward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self diagnostic result” using CONSULT-III.Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to SE-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self diagnostic result” using CONSULT-III.3. Erase the DTC.4. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SE-31, "DTC Logic".Is the DTC displayed again?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding motor connector and driver seat control unit connector.3. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

B2112 SEAT SLIDEThe driver seat control unit detects the output of sliding motor output terminal for 0.1 seconds or more even if the sliding switch is not input

• Driver seat control unit• Slide motor harness is shorted

(+)

(–)Voltage (V)(Approx.)

Sliding motor

Connector Terminal

B52535

Ground 042


B2112 SLIDING MOTOR
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation"


Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

(+)


Driver seat control unit

Connector Terminal

B50435

Ground 042


B2113 RECLINING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



• The seat reclining motor is installed to the seatback frame.• The seat reclining motor is activated with the driver seat control unit.• Tilts the seatback frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PEFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self diagnostic result” using CONSULT-III.Is the DTC detected? YES >> Refer to SE-33, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check “Self diagnostic result” using CONSULT-III.3. Erase the DTC.4. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SE-33, "DTC Logic".Is the DTC displayed again?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect reclining motor and driver seat control unit connector.3. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

DTC No.Trouble diagnosis


B2113 SEAT RECLININGThe driver seat control unit detects the output of re-clining motor output terminal for 0.1 seconds or more even if the reclining switch is not input.

• Driver seat control unit• Reclining motor harness is pow-

er shorted

(+)


Reclining motor

Connector Terminal

B52436

Ground 044


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END

(+)



Connector Terminal

B50436

Ground 044



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITDRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT

DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004543904

NOTE:Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is con-firmed using CONSULT-III.


Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not fusing.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse and fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if fuse and fusible link

are blown.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.3. Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness.NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker, and replace if NG.


Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair or replace harness.

PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT

PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004543905


Check that the following fuse is not fusing.


33Battery power supply

K (40 A)

40 10 (10 A)

(+)



Connector Terminal

B50433

Ground Battery voltage40


Ground


B503 32Existed

B504 48


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.3. Check voltage between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness.NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker, and replace if NG.


Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.


HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT

HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004543906

1.CHECK FUSE


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

40 Battery power supply 10 (10 A)

(+)


Passenger seat control unit

Connector Terminal

B55333



Ground


B552 32Existed

B553 48

Signal name Fuse No.

Battery power supply 35 (15 A)



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat relay.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and heated seat relay terminal con-

nector.

4. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Repair or replace harness between heated seat relay and fuse holder.NO >> Repair or replace harness between heated seat control unit and heated seat relay.

4.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 2

Check voltage between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and heated seat switch harness

connector.

(+)

(−)Voltage (V)(Approx.)

Heated seat control unit

Connector Terminal

Driver side B51860 Ground Battery voltage

Passenger side B575

Heated seat control unit Heated seat relayContinuity


Driver side B51860 M70 3 Existed

Passenger side B575


Ground


Driver side B51860 Not existed

Passenger side B575

(+)

(−) ConditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)


Connector Terminal

Driver side B518

66 GroundHeated seat

switch

ON Battery voltage

OFF 0

Passenger side B575ON Battery voltage

OFF 0




6.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH

Check heated seat switch. • Driver side: Refer to SE-101, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".• Passenger side: Refer to SE-103, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.




>> INSPECTION ENDHEATED SEAT SWITCH

HEATED SEAT SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004543907

1.CHECK FUSE


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.

Heated seat control unit Heated seat switchContinuity


Driver side B518

66

A/T models: M141M/T models: M175

1 Existed

Passenger side B575A/T models: M142M/T models: M176


Ground


Driver side B51866 Not existed

Passenger side B575


Ground


Driver side B51859 Existed

Passenger side B575

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

5 Ignition power supply 3 (10 A)



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between heated seat switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 3.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector.

4. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace fuse block (J/B).

(+)


Heated seat switch

Connector Terminal

Driver sideA/T models: M141M/T models: M175

5 Ground Battery voltage

Passenger sideA/T models: M142M/T models: M176

Heated seat switch Fuse block (J/B)Continuity



5 M1 2A Existed


Heated seat switch

Ground



5 Not existed


(+)


Fuse block (J/B)

Connector Terminal

M1 2A Ground Battery voltage



Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"

>> INSPECTION END


SLIDING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SLIDING SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Sliding switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the sliding switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “SLIDE SW-FR”, “SLIDE SW-RR” in the “Data monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check sliding switch signal under the following conditions.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Sliding switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-41, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power seat switch connector.3. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness con-

nector.

3. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Monitor item Condition Status

SLIDE SW-FR Sliding switch (forward)Operate ON

Release OFF

SLIDE SW-RR Sliding switch (backward)Operate ON

Release OFF

(+)


Power seat switch

Connector Terminal

B51111


Driver seat control unit Power seat switchContinuity


B50311

B51111

Existed26 26


SLIDING SWITCH
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH

Check sliding switch.Refer to SE-42, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between power seat switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


• Sliding switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the sliding switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check seat sliding operation with sliding switch.Is the indication normal?YES >> Sliding switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-43, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


Ground


B50311

Not existed26

Power seat switch Condition Continuity

Terminal

32

11

Sliding switch

Backward Existed

Other than above Not existed

26Forward Existed



SLIDING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check voltage between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Disconnect power seat switch connector.2. Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect sliding switch (seatback) connector.2. Check continuity between sliding switch (seatback) harness connector and power seat switch harness

connector.

3. Check continuity between sliding switch (seatback) harness connector and ground.



Check sliding switch.Refer to SE-44, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".

(+)



Connector Terminal

B552

11

Ground Sliding switch

Backward 0

Other than above Battery voltage

26Forward 0


(+)


Power seat switch

Connector Terminal

B55422


Sliding switch (seatback) Power seat switchContinuity


B56122

B55422

Existed23 23

Sliding switch (seatback)

Ground


B56122

Not existed23


SLIDING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH (SEATBACK)

Check sliding switch (seatback).Refer to SE-46, "SEATBACK : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace sliding switch (seatback). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END





SEATBACK

SEATBACK : Description INFOID:0000000004543916

• Sliding switch is equipped on the seatback.• The operation signal input to passenger seat control unit when sliding switch (seatback) is operated.

SEATBACK : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004543917

1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check seat sliding operation with sliding switch (seatback).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding switch (seatback) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-44, "SEATBACK : Diagnosis Procedure".

SEATBACK : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004543918

1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH (SEATBACK) SIGNAL



Terminal

32

22

Sliding switch

Forward Existed


23Backward Existed



SLIDING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding switch (seatback) circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH (SEATBACK) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and sliding switch (seatback) connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and sliding switch (seatback)

harness connector.

3. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH (SEATBACK) GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between sliding switch (seatback) harness connector and ground.



Check sliding switch (seatback).Refer to SE-46, "SEATBACK : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace sliding switch (seatback). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

5.CHECK PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check voltage between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)



Connector Terminal

B552

11

GroundSliding switch(seatback)

Backward 0


26Forward 0


Passenger seat control unit Sliding switch (seatback)Continuity


B55211

B56111

Existed26 26


Ground


B55211

Not existed26


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B561 32 Existed


SLIDING SWITCH
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace passenger seat control unit. Refer to SE-197, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END

SEATBACK : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004543919


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding switch (seatback) connector.3. Check continuity between sliding switch (seatback) terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sliding switch (seatback). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

(+)



Connector Terminal

B55211


Sliding switch (seatback)Condition Continuity

Terminal

32

11


Backward Existed


26Forward Existed


11 23Backward Not existed

Other than above Existed

26 22Forward Not existed



RECLINING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

RECLINING SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Reclining switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the reclining switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “RECLN SW-FR”, “RECLN SW-RR” in the “Data monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check reclining switch signal under the following conditions.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Reclining switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-47, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH SIGNAL



2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT


nector.



RECLINE SW-FR Reclining switch (forward)Operate ON

Release OFF

RECLINE SW-RR Reclining switch (backward)Operate ON

Release OFF

(+)

(–)Voltage (V) (Approx.)

Power seat switch

Connector Terminal

B51112




B50312

B51112

Existed27 27


RECLINING SWITCH

3.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH

Check reclining switch.Refer to SE-48, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END





PASSENGER SIDE


• Reclining switch is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the reclining switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check seat reclining operation with reclining switch.Is the indication normal?YES >> Reclining switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-49, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


Ground


B50312

Not existed27


Terminal

32

12

Reclining switch

Backward Existed


27Forward Existed



RECLINING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Reclining switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and power seat switch connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness

connector.




Check reclining switch.Refer to SE-50, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



(+)



Connector Terminal

B552

12

Ground Reclining switch

Backward 0


27Forward 0


Passenger seat control unit Power seat switchContinuity


B55212

B55412

Existed27 27


Ground


B55212

Not existed27

(+)



Connector Terminal

B55212



RECLINING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace passenger seat control unit. Refer to SE-197, "Removal and Installation".

Check intermittent incident.Refer toGI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END






Terminal

32

12

Reclining switch

Backward Existed


27Forward Existed



LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)DRIVER SIDE


• Lifting switch (front) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting switch (front) is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “LIFT FR SW-UP”, “LIFT FR SW-DN” in the “Data monitor” mode using CONSULT-III.3. Check lifting switch (front) signal under the following conditions.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Lifting switch (front) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-51, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) SIGNAL



2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT


nector.



LIFT FR SW-UP Lifting switch front (up)Operate ON

Release OFF

LIFT FR SW-DN Lifting switch front (down)Operate ON

Release OFF

(+)


Power seat switch

Connector Terminal

B51113




B50313

B51113

Existed28 28



3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)

Check lifting switch (front).Refer to SE-52, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END





PASSENGER SIDE


• Lifting switch (front) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the lifting switch (front) is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check seat lifting (front) operation with lifting switch (front).Is the indication normal?YES >> Lifting switch (front) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-53, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


Ground


B50313

Not existed28

Power seat switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

32

13

Lifting switch (front)

Down Existed


28Up Existed




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Lifting switch (front) circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT


connector.




Check lifting switch (front).Refer to SE-54, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



(+)



Connector Terminal

B552

13

Ground Lifting switch (front)

Down 0


28UP 0


Passenger seat control unit Power seat switchContinuity


B55213

B55413

Existed28 28


Ground


B55213

Not existed28

(+)



Connector Terminal

B55213





>> INSPECTION END






Terminal

32

13

Lifting switch (front)

Down Existed


28Up Existed



LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)DRIVER SIDE


• Lifting switch (rear) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the driver seat control unit when the lifting switch (rear) is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “LIFT RR SW-UP”, “LIFT RR SW-DN” in the “Data monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check lifting switch (rear) signal under the following conditions.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Lifting switch (rear) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-55, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) SIGNAL



2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT


nector.



LIFT RR SW-UP Lifting switch rear (up)Operate ON

Release OFF

LIFT RR SW-DN Lifting switch rear (down)Operate ON

Release OFF

(+)


Power seat switch

Connector Terminal

B51114


Driver seat control unit Power sear switchContinuity


B50314

B51114

Existed29 29



3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)

Check lifting switch (rear).Refer to SE-56, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END





PASSENGER SIDE


• Lifting switch (rear) is equipped to the power seat switch on the seat cushion side surface.• The operation signal is input to the passenger seat control unit when the lifting switch (rear) is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check seat lifting (rear) operation with lifting switch (rear).Is the indication normal?YES >> Lifting switch (rear) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-57, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


Ground


B50314

Not existed29


Terminal

32

14

Lifting switch (rear)

Down Existed


29Up Existed




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> LIfting switch (front) circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT


connector.




Check lifting switch (rear).Refer to SE-58, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



(+)

(–) ConditionVoltage (V) (Ap-

prox.)Passenger seat control unit

Connector Terminal

B552

14


Down 0


29Up 0


Passenger seat control unit Power sear switchContinuity


B55214

B55414

Existed29 29


Ground


B55214

Not existed29

(+)



Connector Terminal

B55214





>> INSPECTION END






Terminal

32

14

Lifting switch (rear)

Down Existed


29Up Existed



POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUITDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between power seat switch connector and ground.


2.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT

Check lifting switch (rear).Refer to SE-56, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION ENDPASSENGER SIDE



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between power seat switch connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES-1:When power seat switch does not operate any components.>>GO TO 2.YES-2:When all power seat components do not operate.>>GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

2.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT

Check sliding switch.Refer to SE-44, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace power seat switch. Refer to SE-200, "Removal and Installation".


Power seat switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B511 32 Existed

Power seat switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B554 32 Existed


POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END


FORWARD SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

FORWARD SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Forward switch is installed on the seatback frame.• Forward switch detects condition of seatback.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “FORWARD SW” in the “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check the forward switch signal under the following condition.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Forward switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-61, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect forward switch connector.3. Check voltage between forward switch harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and forward switch harness connec-

tor.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation"NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Test item Condition Status

FORWARD SW Driver side seatbackFolded up ON

Folded down OFF

(+)


Forward switch

Connector Terminal

B512 41 Ground Not in the sleep mode 5

Driver seat control unit Forward switchContinuity


B504 41 B512 41 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B504 41 Not existed


FORWARD SWITCH
3.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between forward switch harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH

Check forward switch.Refer to SE-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace forward switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect forward switch connector.3. Check continuity between forward switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace forward switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• Forward switch is installed on seatback frame.• Forward switch detects condition of seatback.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that power walk-in function does not activate when seatback is folded up.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Forward switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-63, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

Forward switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B512 32 Existed

Forward switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

41 32 Driver side seatbackFolded up Not existed

Folded down Existed


FORWARD SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Forward switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FORWARD SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and forward switch connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and forward switch harness con-

nector.



3.FORWARD SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between forward switch harness connector and ground.



Check forward switch.Refer to SE-64, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace forward switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



(+)



Connector Terminal

B553 41 Ground

Seatback is folded up and not in the sleep mode

5

Other than above 0

Passenger seat control unit Forward switchContinuity


B553 41 B556 41 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B553 41 Not existed

Forward switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B556 32 Existed


FORWARD SWITCH



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect forward switch connector.3. Check continuity between forward switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace forward switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

(+)



Connector Terminal


Forward switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

32 41 Passenger side seatbackFolded up Not existed

Folded down Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Seat belt buckle switch is installed in seat belt buckle.• Seat belt buckle switch detects condition of seat belt.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “SEAT BELT SW” in the “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check the forward switch signal under the following condition.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-65, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector.3. Check voltage between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver

side) harness connector.




SEAT BELT SW Driver side seat beltFastened ON

Released OFF

(+)



Connector Terminal


Driver seat control unit Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)Continuity


B503 5 B13 1 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 5 Not existed


3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH

Check seat belt buckle switch (driver side).Refer to SE-66, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector.3. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• Seat belt buckle switch is installed in seat belt buckle.• Seat belt buckle switch detects condition of seat belt.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that power walk-in function does not activate when seat belt is fastened.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-67, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B13 2 Existed

Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)Condition Continuity

Terminal

1 2 Driver side seat beltFastened Not existed

Released Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and seat belt buckle switch

(passenger side) harness connector.



3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.



Check seat belt buckle switch.Refer to SE-68, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (passenger side). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



(+)



Connector Terminal

B552 5 Ground

Passenger side seat belt is fastened, and not in the sleep mode

5

Other than above 0

Passenger seat control unit Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)Continuity




GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 5 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B213 2 Existed





>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) connector.3. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace seat belt buckle switch (passenger side). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

(+)



Connector Terminal


Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)Condition Continuity

Terminal

1 2 Passenger side seat beltFastened Not existed

Released Existed


SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SLIDING LIMIT SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Sliding limit switch is installed on seat cushion frame.• Sliding limit switch detects condition of seat sliding.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “FWD LIMIT SW” in the “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check the sliding limit switch signal under the following condition.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Sliding limit switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-69, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding limit switch connector.3. Check voltage between sliding limit switch harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding limit switch harness con-

nector.




FWD LIMIT SW Seat slidingFront edge ON

Other than above OFF

(+)


Sliding limit switch

Connector Terminal


Driver seat control unit Sliding limit switchContinuity




GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 4 Not existed


3.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between sliding limit switch harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH

Check sliding limit switch.Refer to SE-70, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace sliding limit switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding limit switch connector.3. Check continuity between sliding limit switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sliding limit switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• Sliding limit switch is installed on seat cushion frame.• Sliding limit switch detects condition of seat sliding.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check whether or not power walk-in function activates normally when power walk-in switch is pressed.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding limit switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-71, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B514 32 Existed

Sliding limit switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

4 32 Seat slidingFront edge Not existed




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and sliding limit switch connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and sliding limit switch harness

connector.



3.CHECK SLIDING LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between sliding limit switch harness connector and ground.



Check sliding limit switch.Refer to SE-72, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace sliding limit switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



(+)



Connector Terminal

B552 4 Ground

Sliding position is front edge and not in the sleep mode

5

Other than above 0

Passenger seat control unit Sliding limit switchContinuity




GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 4 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B558 32 Existed





>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding limit switch connector.3. Check continuity between sliding limit switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sliding limit switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

(+)



Connector Terminal


Sliding limit switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

4 32 Seat slidingFront edge Not existed



POWER WALK-IN SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER WALK-IN SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


• Power walk-in switch is installed on seatback.• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when power walk-in switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “WALK-IN SW” in the “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check the power walk-in switch signal under the following condition.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Power walk-in switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-73, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power walk-in switch connector.3. Check voltage between power walk-in switch harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power walk-in switch harness

connector.




WALK-IN SW Power walk-in switchPressed ON

Released OFF

(+)


Power walk-in switch

Connector Terminal

B513 30 Ground Battery voltage

Driver seat control unit Power walk-in switchContinuity


B503 30 B513 30 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 30 Not existed


3.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between power walk-in switch harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH

Check power walk-in switch.Refer to SE-74, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace power walk-in switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power walk-in switch connector.3. Check continuity between power walk-in switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace power walk-in switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• Power walk-in switch is installed on seatback.• The operation signal is input to passenger seat control unit when power walk-in switch is operated.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check whether or not power walk-in function activates normally when power walk-in switch is pressed.Is the indication normal?YES >> Power walk-in switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-75, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B513 32 Existed

Power walk-in switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

30 32 Power walk-in switchPressed Existed

Released Not existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


1.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Power walk-in switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and power walk-in switch connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and power walk-in switch har-

ness connector.



3.CHECK POWER WALK-IN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between power walk-in switch harness connector and ground.



Check power walk-in switch.Refer to SE-76, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace power walk-in switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

5.CHECK PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT


(+)



Connector Terminal

B552 30 Ground Power walk-in switchPressed 0

Released Battery voltage

Passenger seat control unit Power walk-in switchContinuity


B552 30 B557 30 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 30 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B557 32 Existed





>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power walk-in switch connector.3. Check continuity between power walk-in switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace power walk-in switch. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

(+)



Connector Terminal


Power walk-in switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

30 32 Power walk-in switchPressed Existed

Released Not existed


DOOR SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

DOOR SWITCH


Detects passenger side doors open or closed condition.

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004543979

1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that passenger side power walk-in function operates.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Door switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check passenger side door switch.Refer to SE-77, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check signal between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Passenger side door switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect BCM connector, passenger seat control unit connector and passenger side door switch con-nector.

2. Check continuity between passenger side door switch harness connector and passenger seat control unitharness connector.

3. Check continuity between passenger side door switch harness connector and ground.

(+)

(–) ConditionSignal

(Reference value)Passenger seat control unit

Connector Terminal

B552 8 Ground Passenger side door switchPressed

Released 0 V

PKIB4960J

Passenger side door switch Passenger seat control unitContinuity




DOOR SWITCH



>> INSPECTION END

Passenger side door switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B216 2 Not existed


SLIDING SENSOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SLIDING SENSORDRIVER SIDE


• The sliding sensor is installed on the seat slide cushion frame.• The pulse signal is transmitted to the driver seat control unit when sliding is operated.• The driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the sliding amount of the seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “SLIDE PULSE” in the “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT-III. 3. Check sliding sensor signal under the following conditions.

*1: The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.

Is the indication normal?YES >> Sliding sensor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-79, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check signal between sliding sensor harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.


2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding sensor connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connec-

tor.


SLIDE PULSE Seat sliding

Operate (forward) Change (increase)*1

Operate (backward) Change (decrease)*1

Release No change*1

(+)


(Reference value)Sliding sensor

Connector Terminal

B526 24 Ground Seat sliding

Operate

Other than above

0 V or 5 V

JMJIA0119ZZ


SLIDING SENSOR


3.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

Check voltage between sliding sensor harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


tor.



5.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT


tor.


Driver seat control unit Sliding sensorContinuity


B503 24 B526 24 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 24 Not existed

(+)


Sliding sensor

Connector Terminal




B503 16 B526 16 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 16 Not existed



B503 31 B526 31 Existed


SLIDING SENSOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


6.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND

1. Connect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace sliding sensor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


• The sliding sensor is installed on the seat slide cushion frame.• The pulse signal is transmitted to the passenger seat control unit when sliding is operated.• The passenger seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the sliding amount of the seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check whether or not power walk-in function activates normally when power walk-in switch is pressed.Is the indication normal?YES >> Sliding sensor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-81, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check signal between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sliding sensor function is OK.


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 31 No existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B503 31 Existed

(+)


(Reference value)Passenger seat control unit

Connector Terminal

B552 24 Ground Seat sliding

Operate

Other than above

0 V or 5 V

JMJIA0119ZZ


SLIDING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector and sliding sensor connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness con-

nector.



3.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Connect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check voltage between sliding sensor harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness con-

nector.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace passenger seat control unit. Refer to SE-197, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

5.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness con-

nector.

Passenger seat control unit Sliding sensorContinuity


B552 24 B568 24 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 24 Not existed

(+)


Sliding sensor

Connector Terminal




B552 16 B568 16 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 16 Not existed


SLIDING SENSOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



6.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND

1. Connect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between passenger seat control unit harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace sliding sensor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".NO >> Replace passenger seat control unit. Refer to SE-197, "Removal and Installation".



B552 31 B568 31 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 31 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B552 31 Existed


SLIDING MOTOR
SLIDING MOTORDRIVER SIDE


• The seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame.• The seat sliding motor is activated with the driver seat control unit.• The seat is slid forward/backward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “SEAT SLIDE” in the “Active Test” mode using CONSULT-III.3. Check sliding motor operation.

Is the operation of relevant parts normal?YES >> Sliding motor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-84, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding motor connector.3. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between sliding motor harness connector and driver seat control unit harness connector.



SEAT SLIDE

OFF

Seat sliding

Stop

FR Forward

RR Backward

(+)


Sliding motor

Connector Terminal

B525

35

Ground Slide switch

Forward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

42Backward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Sliding motor Driver seat control unitContinuity


B52535

B50435

Existed42 42


SLIDING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR

Check sliding motor.Refer to SE-85, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR-1

Visually check the sliding motor for foreign objects, and check that the sliding motor is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (sliding motor).


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding motor connector.3. Supply sliding motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• The seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame.• The seat sliding motor is activated with the passenger seat control unit.• The seat is slid forward/backward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.



Check sliding operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?


Ground


B50435

Not existed42

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Sliding motor35 42 Forward

42 35 Backward


SLIDING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> Sliding motor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-86, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding motor connector.3. Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.



1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between sliding motor harness connector and passenger seat control unit harness con-

nector.




Check sliding motor.Refer to SE-87, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END

(+)


Sliding motor

Connector Terminal

B567

35

Ground Slide switch


Other than above 0


Other than above 0

Sliding motor Passenger seat control unitContinuity


B56735

B55335

Existed42 42


Ground


B55335

Not existed42


SLIDING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



Visually check the sliding motor for foreign objects, and check that the sliding motor is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (sliding motor).


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sliding motor connector.3. Supply sliding motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Sliding motor35 42 Forward

42 35 Backward


RECLINING MOTOR
RECLINING MOTORDRIVER SIDE


• The seat reclining motor is installed to the seatback frame. • The seat reclining motor is activated with the driver seat control unit. • The seatback is reclined forward/backward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.


1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR FUNCTION

Check reclining operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Reclining motor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-88, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect reclining motor connector.3. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and driver seat control unit harness connec-

tor.

3. Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and ground.


(+)


Reclining motor

Connector Terminal

B524

36



Other than above 0


Other than above 0

Reclining motor Driver seat control unitContinuity


B52436

B50436

Existed44 44

Reclining motor

Ground


B52436

Not existed44


RECLINING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR

Check reclining motor.Refer to SE-89, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR-1

Visually check the sliding motor for foreign objects, and check that the reclining motor is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seatback frame (reclining motor).


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect reclining motor connector.3. Supply reclining motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• The seat reclining motor is installed to the seatback frame. • The seat reclining motor is activated with the passenger seat control unit. • The seatback is reclined forward/backward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.


1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR FUNCTION

Check reclining operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Reclining motor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-89, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect reclining motor connector.3. Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Reclining motor36 44 Forward

44 36 Backward


RECLINING MOTOR

2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and passenger seat control unit harness

connector.

3. Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and ground.



Check reclining motor.Refer to SE-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



Visually check the sliding motor for foreign objects, and check that the reclining motor is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seatback frame (reclining motor).


(+)


Reclining motor

Connector Terminal

B566

36



Other than above 0


Other than above 0

Reclining motor Passenger seat control unitContinuity


B56636

B55336

Existed44 44

Reclining motor

Ground


B56636

Not existed44


RECLINING MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect reclining motor connector.3. Supply reclining motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Reclining motor36 44 Forward

44 36 Backward


LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)DRIVER SIDE


• The lifting motor (front) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. • The lifting motor (front) is activated with the driver seat control unit.• The lifter (front) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (front).


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) FUNCTION

Check lifting operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Lifting motor (front) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-92, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector.3. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and driver seat control unit harness con-

nector.

3. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.


(+)


Lifting motor (front)

Connector Terminal

B528

37


Downward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

45Upward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Lifting motor (front) Driver seat control unitContinuity


B52837

B50437

Existed45 45


Ground


B52837

Not existed45



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)

Check lifting motor (front).Refer to SE-93, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) -1

Visually check the lifting motor (front) for foreign objects, and check that the lifting motor (front) is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector.3. Supply lifting motor (front) terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


• The lifting motor (front) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame. • The lifting motor (front) is activated with the passenger seat control unit.• The lifter (front) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (front).


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) FUNCTION

Check lifting operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Lifting motor (front) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-93, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector.3. Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Lifting motor (front) 37 45 Downward

45 37 Upward



2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and passenger seat control unit harness

connector.

3. Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.



Check lifting motor (front).Refer to SE-94, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



Visually check the lifting motor (front) for foreign objects, and check that the lifting motor (front) is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).


(+)



Connector Terminal

B569

37


Downward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

45Upward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Lifting motor (front) Passenger seat control unitContinuity


B56937

B55337

Existed45 45


Ground


B56937

Not existed45



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector.3. Supply lifting motor (front) terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Lifting motor (front) 37 45 Downward

45 37 Upward


LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)DRIVER SIDE


• The lifting motor (rear) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame.• The lifting motor (rear) is activated with the driver seat control unit.• The seat lifter (rear) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (rear).


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) FUNCTION

Check lifting operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Lifting motor (rear) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-96, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector.3. Check voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and driver seat control unit harness con-

nector.

3. Check continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.


(+)


Lifting motor (rear)

Connector Terminal

B530

38

Ground Lifting switch (rear)

Upward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

39Downward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Lifting motor (rear) Driver seat control unitContinuity


B53038

B50438

Existed39 39


Ground


B53038

Not existed39



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)

Check lifting motor (rear).Refer to SE-97, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) -1

Visually check the lifting motor (rear) for foreign objects, and check that the lifting motor (rear) is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector.3. Supply lifting motor (rear) terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace lifting motor (rear).

PASSENGER SIDE


• The lifting motor (rear) is installed to the seat slide cushion frame.• The lifting motor (rear) is activated with the passenger seat control unit.• The seat lifter (rear) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (rear).


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) FUNCTION

Check lifting operation with power seat switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Lifting motor (rear) function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-97, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector.3. Check voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Lifting motor (rear)38 39 Upward

39 38 Downward



2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect passenger seat control unit connector.2. Check continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and passenger seat control unit harness

connector.

3. Check continuity between lifting motor (rear) unit harness connector and ground.



Check lifting motor (rear).Refer to SE-98, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".



>> INSPECTION END



Visually check the lifting motor (rear) for foreign objects, and check that the lifting motor (rear) is not broken.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace seat cushion frame (lifting motor).


(+)



Connector Terminal

B570

38

Ground Lifting switch (rear)

Upward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

39Downward Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Lifting motor (rear) Passenger seat control unitContinuity


B57038

B55338

Existed39 39


Ground


B57038

Not existed39



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector.3. Supply lifting motor (rear) terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

ItemTerminal

Operation(+) (–)

Lifting motor (rear) 38 39 Up

39 38 Down


HEATED SEAT SWITCH
HEATED SEAT SWITCHDRIVER SIDE


Adjusts heated seat temperature and deactivates heated seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-100, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and heated seat control unit harness

connector.


(+)



Connector Terminal

B518 67 GroundHeated seat switch position

OFF 0

1 (Min. temperature) 12.24

2 12.33

3 12.49

4 12.63

5 12.76

6 (Max. temperature) 12.90

Heated seat switch Heated seat control unitContinuity



2 B518 67 Existed


HEATED SEAT SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



Check heated seat switch. Refer to SE-101, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK FRONT HEATED SEAT SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check resistance between heated seat switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


Adjusts heated seat temperature and deactivates heated seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.

Heated seat switch

Ground



2 Not existed

Heated seat switchCondition

Resistance(KΩ)

(Approx.)Connector Terminal


5

1

Heated seat switch position

ON 0

OFF ∞

2


2 1.800

3 1.200

4 0.910

5 0.620



HEATED SEAT SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-102, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

1.CHECK HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch circuit is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and heated seat control unit harness

connector.




Check heated seat switch. Refer to SE-103, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".


(+)



Connector Terminal

B575 67 GroundHeated seat switch position

OFF 0


2 12.33

3 12.49

4 12.63

5 12.76


Heated seat switch Heated seat control unitContinuity



2 B575 67 Existed

Heated seat switch

Ground



2 Not existed


HEATED SEAT SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK FRONT HEATED SEAT SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check resistance between heated seat switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".

Heated seat switchCondition

Resistance(KΩ)



5

1

Heated seat switch position

ON 0

OFF ∞

2


2 1.800

3 1.200

4 0.910

5 0.620

6 (Max. tempera-ture)

0.348


HEATED SEAT RELAY
HEATED SEAT RELAY


Power is supplied to the heated seat using ignition power supply control.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat relay function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-104, "Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat relay.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between heated seat relay terminal connector and ground.


2.CHECK HEATED SEAT RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat relay terminal connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector.

4. Check continuity between heated seat relay terminal connector and ground.


3.CHECK HEATED SEAT RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between heated seat relay terminal connector and ground.

(+)


Heated seat relay

Connector Terminal

M70 2 Ground Battery voltage

Heated seat relay Fuse block (J/B)Continuity


M70 2 M1 2A Existed

Heated seat relay

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M70 2 Not existed


HEATED SEAT RELAY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S


4.CHECK HEATED SEAT RELAY

Check heated seat relay.Refer to SE-105, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat relay circuit is OK.NO >> Replace heated seat relay.



>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat relay.3. Check continuity between heated seat relay terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace heated seat relay.

Heated seat relay

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M70 1 Existed

heated seat relayCondition Continuity

Terminal

3 5

12 V direct current supply between termi-nals 1 and 2.

Existed

No current supply Not existed

SEF497Y


HEAT SENSOR
HEAT SENSORDRIVER SIDE


Detects seat cushion heater temperature and outputs to heated seat control unit.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heat sensor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-106, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK HEAT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.

NOTE:Voltage is repeated within the value shown as per the following list depending on heater unit temperature.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> heat sensor is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HEAT SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector and seat cushion heater connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and seat cushion heater harness

connector.



(+)



Connector Terminal

B518 69 Ground Heated seat switch position

OFF 0

1 (Min. temperature) 10.87 – 11.02

2 10.93 – 11.07

3 11.04 – 11.17

4 11.13 – 11.26

5 11.22 – 11.34

6 (Max. temperature) 11.31 – 11.43

Heated seat control unit Seat cushion heaterContinuity


B518 69 B517 69 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B518 69 Not existed


HEAT SENSOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK HEAT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Turn heated seat switch ON.3. Check voltage between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK HEAT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and seat cushion heater harness

connector.



5.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

Check heat sensor. Refer to SE-107, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector.3. Check resistance between seat cushion heater terminals.

(+)


Seat cushion heater

Connector Terminal




B518 66 B517 66 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B518 66 Not existed


HEAT SENSOR
NOTE:Resistance value changes according to temperature.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE


Detects seat cushion heater temperature and outputs to heated seat control unit.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heat sensor function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-108, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure"


1.CHECK HEAT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between heated seat control unit harness connector and ground.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> heat sensor is OK.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HEAT SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector and seat cushion heater connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and seat cushion heater harness

connector.

Seat cushion heaterCondition

Resistance(KΩ)

(Approx.)Terminal

66 69 When heat sensor temperature is 25°C (77°F) 9.9 – 10.1

(+)



Connector Terminal

B575 69 Ground Heated seat switch position

OFF 0

1 (Min. temperature) 10.87 – 11.02

2 10.93 – 11.07

3 11.04 – 11.17

4 11.13 – 11.26

5 11.22 – 11.34

6 (Max. temperature) 11.31 – 11.43


HEAT SENSOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



3.CHECK HEAT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Turn heated seat switch ON.3. Check voltage between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.


4.CHECK HEAT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat control unit harness connector and seat cushion heater harness

connector.



5.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

Check heat sensor. Refer to SE-110, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".





B575 69 B574 69 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B575 69 Not existed

(+)


Seat cushion heater

Connector Terminal




B575 66 B574 66 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B575 66 Not existed


HEAT SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector.3. Check resistance between seat cushion heater terminals.




Resistance(KΩ)

(Approx.)Terminal



SEAT CUSHION HEATER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SEAT CUSHION HEATERDRIVER SIDE


Warms the seat cushion.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat cushion heater function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-111, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.



2.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector.3. Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and heated seat control unit harness

connector.

4. Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace heated seat control unit. Refer to SE-198, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER

(+)


Seat cushion heater

Connector Terminal

B517 68 Ground Heated seatOperates 0 – Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Seat cushion heater Heated seat control unitContinuity


B517 68 B518 68 Existed

Seat cushion heater

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B517 68 Not existed


SEAT CUSHION HEATER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Check seat cushion heater.Refer to SE-112, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.




>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector and seatback heater connector.3. Check resistance between seat cushion heater terminals.



PASSENGER SIDE




1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seat cushion heater function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-112, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER INPUT SIGNAL

Seat cushion heater

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B517 59 Existed


Resistance(Ω)

(Approx.)Terminal



SEAT CUSHION HEATER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.



2.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector.3. Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and heated seat control unit harness

connector.

4. Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace heated seat control unit. Refer to SE-198, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.


Check seat cushion heater.Refer to SE-114, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

4.CHECK SEAT CUSHION HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between seat cushion heater harness connector and ground.



Check intermittent incident.

(+)


Seat cushion heater

Connector Terminal

B574 68 Ground Heated seatOperates 0 – Battery voltage

Other than above 0

Seat cushion heater Heated seat control unitContinuity


B574 68 B575 68 Existed

Seat cushion heater

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B574 68 Not existed

Seat cushion heater

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B574 59 Existed


SEAT CUSHION HEATER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"
>> INSPECTION END



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seat cushion heater connector and seatback heater connector.3. Check resistance between seat cushion heater terminals.




Resistance(Ω)

(Approx.)Terminal



SEATBACK HEATER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SEATBACK HEATERDRIVER SIDE




1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seatback heater function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-115, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SEATBACK HEATER

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seatback heater connector.3. Check resistance between seatback heater terminals.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".NO >> Replace seatback heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE




1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that heated seat warms to preset temperature when operating heated seat switch to the optimal posi-tion.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Seatback heater function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-115, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect seatback heater connector.3. Check resistance between seatback heater terminals.

Seatback heaterCondition

Resistance(Ω)


B542 1 2 When heat sensor temperature is 20°C (68°F) 4.0 – 4.7


SEATBACK HEATER

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace seat cushion heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".NO >> Replace seatback heater. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded View".

Seatback heaterCondition

Resistance(Ω)


B582 1 2 When heat sensor temperature is 20°C (68°F) 4.0 – 4.7


HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATORDRIVER SIDE


Illuminates the indicator that indicates the operating status of heated seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that the related indicator lamp illuminates when heated seat switch is set to ON. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch indicator function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-117, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

PASSENGER SIDE


Illuminates the indicator that indicates the operating status of heated seat.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check that the related indicator lamp illuminates when heated seat switch is set to ON. Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Heated seat switch indicator function is OK.NO >> Refer to SE-117, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF2. Disconnect heated seat switch connector.3. Check continuity between heated seat switch harness connector and ground.


Heated seat switch

Ground



6 Existed

Heated seat switch

Ground



6 Existed


HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> Replace heated seat switch. Refer to SE-204, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

LUMBAR SUPPORT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

LUMBAR SUPPORT

Wiring Diagram - LUMBAR SUPPORT - INFOID:0000000004544070

JCJWM0656GB


LUMBAR SUPPORT
JCJWM0657GB


LUMBAR SUPPORT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0658GB


SIDE SUPPORT
SIDE SUPPORT

Wiring Diagram - SIDE SUPPORT - INFOID:0000000004544072

JCJWM0653GB


SIDE SUPPORT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0654GB


SIDE SUPPORT
JCJWM0655GB


DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONDRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSI-TIONER)


VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM

*1: A/T model*2: M/T model*3: The value at the position attained when the battery is connected is regarded as 32768.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

SLIDE SW–FR Sliding switch (front)Operate ON

Release OFF

SLIDE SW–RR Sliding switch (rear)Operate ON

Release OFF

FORWARD SW Seat backFolded down ON


WALK-IN SW Power walk-in switchPressed ON


FWD LIMIT SW Seat slidingFront edge ON


SEAT BELT SW Seat beltFront edge ON


DETENT SW*1 A/T selector leverP position OFF

Other than above ON

PARK BRAKE SW*2 Parking brakeApplied ON

Release OFF

SLIDE PULSE Seat sliding

Forward The numeral value decreases *3

Backward The numeral value increases *3

Other than above No change to numeral value*3

JMJIA2587ZZ



Description

ConditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)

(+) (–) Signal nameInput/Out-put

3(R/Y)

— CAN-H — — —

4(O/B)

GroundSliding limit switch signal

InputSeat sliding front edge 0

Other than above* 5

5(L)

GroundSeat belt buckle switch signal (driver side)

Input

Ignition switch OFF and seat belt fas-tened*

5

Ignition switch ON and seat belt released Battery voltage

Other than above 0

11(BR)

GroundSliding switch back-ward signal

Input Sliding switch

Operate(backward)

0

Release Battery voltage

12(SB)

GroundReclining switch backward signal

Input Reclining switch

Operate(backward)

0


13(LG/R)

GroundLifting switch (front) downward signal

InputLifting switch (front)

Operate(downward)

0


14(G/B)

GroundLifting switch (rear) downward signal

Input Lifting switch (rear)

Operate(downward)

0


16(O)

Ground Sensor power supplyOut-put

— Battery voltage

19(V)

— CAN-L — — —

24(R)

Ground Sliding sensor signal Input Seat slidingOperate

Stop 0 or 5

26(Y)

GroundSliding switch for-ward signal


Operate (forward)

0


27(R/G)

GroundReclining switch for-ward signal


Operate (forward)

0


28(W/B)

GroundLifting switch (front) upward signal

InputSeat lifting switch (front)

Operate (upward)

0


29(R/L)

GroundLifting switch (rear) upward signal

InputSeat lifting switch (rear)

Operate (upward)

0


JMJIA0119ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

*: Not in the sleep mode.

Wiring Diagram - POWER SEAT SYSTEM FOR DRIVER SIDE (WITHOUT AUTO-

30(P)

GroundPower walk-in switch signal

InputPower walk-in switch

Pressed 0


31(GR)

Ground Sensor ground — — 0

32(B/W)

Ground Ground (signal) — — 0

33(R)

Ground Power source (C/B) Input — Battery voltage

35(W/R)

GroundSliding motor forward output

Out-put

Seat sliding

Operate (forward)

Battery voltage

Release 0

36(G/Y)

GroundReclining motor for-ward output signal

Out-put

Seat reclining

Operate (forward)

Battery voltage

Release 0

37(G/W)

GroundLifting motor (front) downward output

Out-put

Seat lifting (front)

Operate(downward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

38(L/Y)

GroundLifting motor (rear) upward output

Out-put

Seat lifting (rear)

Operate(upward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

39(R/B)

GroundLifting motor (rear) downward output

Out-put

Seat lifting (rear)

Operate(downward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

40(R/W)

Ground Power source (Fuse) Input — Battery voltage

41(Y/G)

GroundForward switch sig-nal

InputSeatback is folded down 0

Other than above* 5

42(W)

GroundSliding motor back-ward output

Out-put

Seat sliding

Operate(backward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

44(P)

GroundReclining motor backward output

Out-put

Seat reclining

Operate(backward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

45(L/R)

GroundLifting motor (front) upward output

Out-put

Seat lifting (front)

Operate(upward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

48(B)

Ground Ground (power) — — 0


Description


(+) (–) Signal nameInput/Out-put


MATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) - INFOID:0000000004544198

JCJWM0641GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0642GB


JCJWM0643GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0644GB


JCJWM0645GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000004544200

The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed.

JCJWM0646GB


*1: Driver seat without automatic driver positioner system display.


*1:

Operating infail-safe mode

Malfunction ItemRelated

DTCDiagnosis

Only manual functions operate normally.

CAN communication*1 U1000

With ADP: ADP-48, "DTC

Logic"

Without ADP: ADP-48, "DTC

Logic"

Tilt sensor B2118ADP-53, "DTC

Logic"

Telescopic sensor B2119ADP-56, "DTC

Logic"

Detent switch B2126ADP-59, "DTC

Logic"

Parking brake switch B2127ADP-61, "DTC

Logic"

Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally. UART communication B2128ADP-63, "DTC

Logic"

Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally. Seat sliding output*1 B2112ADP-49, "DTC

Logic"

Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally. Seat reclining output*1 B2113ADP-51, "DTC

Logic"

CONSULT-IIIdisplay

Timing*1

Item Reference pageCurrent mal-function

Previous mal-function

CAN COMM CIRCUIT*2

[U1000]0 1-39 CAN communication


Logic"


Logic"

SEAT SLIDE*2

[B2112]0 1-39 Seat slide motor output


Logic"


Logic"

SEAT RECLINING*2

[B2113]0 1-39 Seat reclining motor output

ADP-51, "DTC Logic"

TILT SENSOR[B2118]

0 1-39 Tilt sensor inputADP-53, "DTC

Logic"

TELESCO SENSOR[B2119]

0 1-39 Telescopic sensor inputADP-56, "DTC

Logic"

DETENT SW[B2126]

0 1-39 Detention switch conditionADP-59, "DTC

Logic"

PARKING BRAKE[B2127]

0 1-39 Parking brake switch conditionADP-61, "DTC

Logic"

UART COMM[B2128]

0 1-39 UART communicationADP-63, "DTC

Logic"



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• 0: Current malfunction is present

• 1-39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. The numeral value increases by one at eachIGN ON to OFF cycle from 1 to 39. The counter remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. However, the counter is resetto 1 if any malfunction is detected again, the normal operation is resumed and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON.

*2: Driver seat without automatic driver positioner system display.




TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JMJIA2588ZZ


Description


(+) (–) Signal nameInput/Output

4(O/B)

GroundSliding limit switch signal

InputSeat sliding front edge 0

Other than above* 5

5(L)

GroundSeat belt buckle switch signal (pas-senger side)

Input

Ignition switch OFF and seat belt fas-tened*

5

Ignition switch ON and seat belt re-leased

Battery voltage

Other than above 0

8(LG)

GroundPassenger side door switch signal

Input Passenger door

Open 0

Closed

11(BR)

GroundSliding switch back-ward signal


Operate(backward)

0


12(SB)

GroundReclining switch backward signal


Operate(backward)

0


13(LG/R)

GroundLifting switch (front) downward signal

InputLifting switch (front)

Operate(downward)

0


14(G/B)

GroundLifting switch (rear) downward signal

InputLifting switch (rear)

Operate(downward)

0


16(O)

Ground Sensor power supply Output — Battery voltage

PKIB4960J



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

24(R)

Ground Sliding sensor signal Input Seat slidingOperate

Stop 0 or 5

26(Y)

GroundSliding switch for-ward signal


Operate (forward)

0


27(R/G)

GroundReclining switch for-ward signal


Operate (forward)

0


28(W/B)

GroundLifting switch (front) upward signal

InputSeat lifting switch (front)

Operate (upward)

0


29(P/L)

GroundLifting switch (rear) upward signal

InputSeat lifting switch (rear)

Operate (upward)

0


30(P)

GroundPower walk-in switch signal

InputPower walk-in switch

Pressed 0


31(GR)

Ground Sensor ground — — 0

32(B/W)

Ground Ground (signal) — — 0

33(R)

Ground Power source (C/B) Input — Battery voltage

35(W/R)

GroundSliding motor for-ward output

Output Seat sliding

Operate (forward)

Battery voltage

Release 0

36(G/Y)

GroundReclining motor for-ward output signal

Output Seat reclining

Operate (forward)

Battery voltage

Release 0

37(G/W)

GroundLifting motor (front) downward output

Output Seat lifting (front)

Operate(downward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

38(L/Y)

GroundLifting motor (rear) upward output

Output Seat lifting (rear)

Operate(upward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

39(R/B)

GroundLifting motor (rear) downward output

Output Seat lifting (rear)

Operate(downward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

40(R/W)

Ground Power source (Fuse) Input — Battery voltage

41(Y/G)

GroundForward switch sig-nal

InputSeatback is folded down 0

Other than above* 5


Description



JMJIA0119ZZ


*: Not in the sleep mode.

42(W)

GroundSliding motor back-ward output

Output Seat sliding

Operate(backward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

44(P)

GroundReclining motor backward output

Output Seat reclining

Operate(backward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

45(L/R)

GroundLifting motor (front) upward output

Output Seat lifting (front)

Operate(upward)

Battery voltage

Stop 0

48(B)

Ground Ground (power) — — 0


Description





C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Wiring Diagram - POWER SEAT SYSTEM FOR PASSENGER SIDE - INFOID:0000000004544203

JCJWM0647GB


JCJWM0648GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0649GB


JCJWM0650GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0651GB


JCJWM0652GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S



TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

*: Voltage is repeated within the value shown as per the following list depending on heater unit temperature.

JMJIA2339ZZ


Description



59(B)

Ground Ground – Ignition switch ON 0

60(Y)

Ground IGN power supply Input Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0

ON Battery voltage

66(B)

GroundHeated seat operation sig-nal

Input Heated seatOperate Battery voltage

Other than above 0

67(W)

Ground Heated seat switch signal InputHeated seat switch

OFF 0


2 12.33

3 12.49

4 12.63

5 12.76


68(R/W)

GroundSeat cushion heater pow-er supply

Output Heated seatOperate 0 – Battery voltage*

Other than above 0

69(R)

Ground Heat sensor signal InputHeated seat switch

OFF 0

1 (Min. temperature) 10.87 – 11.02*

2 10.93 – 11.07*

3 11.04 – 11.17*

4 11.13 – 11.26*

5 11.22 – 11.34*

6 (Max. temperature) 11.31 – 11.43*


Wiring Diagram - HEATED SEAT SYSTEM (WITH M/T) - INFOID:0000000004544206

JCJWM0659GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0660GB


JCJWM0661GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0662GB


Wiring Diagram - HEATED SEAT SYSTEM (WITH A/T) - INFOID:0000000004544207

JCJWM0663GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0664GB


JCJWM0665GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

JCJWM0666GB


ALL COMPONENTS OF POWER SEAT DO NOT OPERATE
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISALL COMPONENTS OF POWER SEAT DO NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply circuit and ground circuit.Refer to SE-35, "DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check power seat switch ground circuit.Refer to SE-59, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check the operation again.Is the result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.

PASSENGER SIDE



Check power supply and ground circuit.Refer to SE-35, "PASSENGER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check power seat switch ground circuit.Refer to SE-59, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




POWER SEAT SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) DOES NOT OPERATE ANY COM-PONENTS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

POWER SEAT SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) DOES NOT OPERATE ANYCOMPONENTS



Check power seat switch ground circuit.Refer to SE-59, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




SLIDING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
SLIDING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK SLIDING MECHANISM

Check for the following.• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding switch.Refer to SE-41, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding motor.Refer to SE-84, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE


1.CHECK SLIDING OPERATION

Check sliding operation.Which sliding switch is malfunctioning?Both sides>>GO TO 2.Seatback side>>GO TO 4.Power seat switch side>>GO TO 5.

2.CHECK SLIDING MECHANISM



Check sliding motor.Refer to SE-85, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?


SLIDING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding switch (seatback).Refer to SE-44, "SEATBACK : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding switch.Refer to SE-42, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




RECLINING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
RECLINING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK RECLINING MECHANISM



Check reclining switch.Refer to SE-47, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check forward switch.Refer to SE-61, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check reclining motor.Refer to SE-88, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE


1.CHECK RECLINING MECHANISM



Check reclining switch.Refer to SE-48, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?


RECLINING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check forward switch.Refer to SE-62, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check reclining motor.Refer to SE-89, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




LIFTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
LIFTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEFRONT

FRONT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004544421

1.CHECK LIFTING MECHANISM



Check lifting switch (front).• Driver side: Refer to SE-51, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".• Passenger side: Refer to SE-52, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check lifting motor (front).• Driver side: Refer to SE-92, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".• Passenger side: Refer to SE-93, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



REAR

REAR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004544422

1.CHECK LIFTING MECHANISM



Check lifting switch (rear).• Driver side: Refer to SE-55, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".• Passenger side: Refer to SE-56, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check lifting motor (rear).


LIFTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• Driver side: Refer to SE-96, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".• Passenger side: Refer to SE-97, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK SEAT SLIDING OPERATION

Check seat sliding operation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to SE-156, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

1. Perform initialization procedure.Refer to SE-8, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement".

2. Check power walk-in function.Refer to SE-11, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description".

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Power walk-in function is normal.NO >> GO TO 3.


Check power walk-in switch.Refer to SE-73, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check seat belt buckle switch.Refer to SE-65, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check forward switch.Refer to SE-61, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding limit switch.Refer to SE-69, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

7.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check driver side door switch.Refer to SE-77, "Component Function Check"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

8.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Check sliding sensor.Refer to SE-79, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check the operation again.Refer to SE-11, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description".Is the result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


1.CHECK SEAT SLIDING OPERATION

Check seat sliding operation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to SE-156, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1. Perform initialization procedure.Refer to SE-8, "SYSTEM INITIALIZATION : Special Repair Requirement".

2. Check power walk-in function.Refer to SE-11, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description".

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Power walk-in function is normal.NO >> GO TO 3.


Check power walk-in switch.Refer to SE-74, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check seat belt buckle switch.Refer to SE-66, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check forward switch.Refer to SE-62, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check sliding limit switch.Refer to SE-70, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?


< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check passenger side door switch.Refer to SE-77, "Component Function Check"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

8.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR

Check sliding sensor.Refer to SE-79, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 9.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check the operation again.Refer to SE-11, "POWER WALK-IN FUNCTION : System Description".Is the result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Replace passenger seat control unit. Refer to SE-197, "Removal and Installation".


HEATED SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

HEATED SEAT DOES NOT OPERATEBOTH SIDES

BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004544428

1.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY

Check heated seat switch power supply.Refer to SE-38, "HEATED SEAT SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check heated seat relay.Refer to SE-104, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check heated seat switch power supply and ground circuit.Refer to SE-36, "HEATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



DRIVER SIDE







Check heated seat switch.Refer to SE-100, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


HEATED SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE

Check seat cushion heater.Refer to SE-111, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE







Check heated seat switch.Refer to SE-101, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Check seat cushion heater.Refer to SE-112, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




SEATBACK HEATER ONLY DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SEATBACK HEATER ONLY DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE



Check seatback heater.Refer to SE-115, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE



Check seatback heater.Refer to SE-115, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




CANNOT ADJUST HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE
CANNOT ADJUST HEATED SEAT TEMPERATUREDRIVER SIDE



Check heated seat switch.Refer to SE-100, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

Check heat sensor.Refer to SE-106, "DRIVER SIDE : Description".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Replace heated seat control unit. Refer to SE-198, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE



Check heated seat switch.Refer to SE-101, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK HEAT SENSOR

Check heat sensor.Refer to SE-108, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> Replace heated seat control unit. Refer to SE-198, "Removal and Installation".


HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ONDRIVER SIDE


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR

Check heated seat switch indicator.Refer to SE-117, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE


1.CHECK HEATED SEAT SWITCH INDICATOR

Check heated seat switch indicator.Refer to SE-117, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES


CUSTOMER INTERVIEWInterview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any ofcustomer's comments; refer to SE-174, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate theconditions that exist when the noise occurs.• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain

all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is

concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics

are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language whendefining the noise.

• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping

• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-dent on materials/often brought on by activity.

• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missingclip or fastener/incorrect clearance.

• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.

• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driveraction or road conditions.

• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.

• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.

• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that a technicianmay judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.

• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVEIf possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information onthe Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used toduplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.

SBT842



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:1) Close a door.2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.3) Rev the engine.4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the

vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINSAfter verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relatedto that concern or symptom.If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool

(Chassis ear: J-39570, Engine ear and mechanics stethoscope).2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.

Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be brokenor lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.

• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-porarily.

• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of thenoise.

• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.• Looking for loose components and contact marks.

Refer to SE-172, "Inspection Procedure".

REPAIR THE CAUSE• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-

thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized Nissan PartsDepartment.

CAUTION:Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.NOTE:Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can beordered separately as needed.URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]Insulates connectors, harness, etc.76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)INSULATOR (Foam blocks)Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)INSULATOR (Light foam block)80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)FELT CLOTHTAPEUsed to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape rollThe following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE


< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.SILICONE GREASEUsed in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. Will only last a few months.SILICONE SPRAYUsed when grease cannot be applied.DUCT TAPEUsed to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIRConfirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the sameconditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004684670

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.

INSTRUMENT PANELMost incidents are caused by contact and movement between:1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish4. Instrument panel to windshield5. Instrument panel mounting pins6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint

These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or bypressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired byapplying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulatewiring harness.CAUTION:Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, therecheck of repair becomes impossible.

CENTER CONSOLEComponents to pay attention to include:1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unitThe instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORSPay attention to the following:1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher3. Wiring harnesses tapping4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stopsTapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolatemany of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks fromthe Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.

TRUNKTrunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.In addition look for the following:1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together4. A loose license plate or bracket



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-ing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLININGNoises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeakingAgain, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of theseincidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

SEATSWhen isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seats in and the load placed on the seat whenthe noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise.Cause of seat noise include:1. Headrest rods and holder2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame3. The rear seatback lock and bracketThese noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-ditions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the componentor applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOODSome interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is thentransmitted into the passenger compartment.Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:1. Any component mounted to the engine wall2. Components that pass through the engine wall3. Engine wall mounts and connectors4. Loose radiator mounting pins5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment6. Hood striker out of adjustmentThese noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The bestmethod is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPMor load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, orinsulating the component causing the noise.


Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000004250190

PIIB8741E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

PIIB8742E


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >











Service Notice INFOID:0000000004250192

• When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding onto the vehicle body to preventscratches.

• Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to oil ordamage them.

• Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts.• When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts.• When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust preven-

tion measures.

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000004250193

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a componentmay be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.

• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the componentwith a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.

• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them.• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

S

• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.• After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally.• Follow the steps below to clean components.- Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the

fouled area.Then rub with a soft and dry cloth.

- Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipethe fouled area.Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub witha soft and dry cloth.

• Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, and gasoline.• For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATIONPREPARATION

Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000004250194

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004250195

Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)

Tool nameDescription

(J39570)Chassis ear

Locates the noise

(J43980)NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairs the cause of noise

SIIA0993E

SIIA0994E

Tool name Description

Engine ear Locates the noise

Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls and metal clips

Hook and pick tool Removes the snap pins

SIIA0995E

JMKIA3050ZZ

JMJIA0490ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

S

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONFRONT SEAT


DRIVER'S SEAT

JMJIA1021GB


FRONT SEAT
PASSENGER'S SEAT

1. Headrest 2. Front outer slide cover 3. Front inner slide cover

4. Rear outer slide cover 5. Rear inner slide cover 6. Seat cushion outer finisher

7. Seat slide and lifter switch knob 8. Seat reclining switch knob 9. Seat control switch

10. Lumbar support switch 11. Side support switch 12. Seat cushion outer finisher inside (front)

13. Seat cushion outer finisher inside (rear)

14. Seat cushion inner finisher 15. Seat cushion inner finisher inside (front)

16. Seat cushion inner finisher inside (rear)

17. Snap ring 18. Lumbar support lever knob

19. Walk-in lever cap 20. Walk-in lever upper escutcheon 21. Headrest holder (free)

22. Headrest holder (locked) 23. Seatback lower panel 24. Side air bag module

25. Seatback trim 26. Seatback pad 27. Seatback silencer

28. Seatback side support bag and unit 29. Reclining device outer cover (out-side)

30. Reclining device outer cover (inside)

31. Reclining device inner cover (out-side)

32. Reclining device inner cover (inside) 33. Push nut

34. Walk-in lever 35. Reclining device wire 36. Reclining and slide relay

37. Seatback frame 38. Seat cushion front finisher 39. Seat belt buckle

40. Seat cushion pad (front) 41. Seat cushion trim 42. Seat cushion pad

43. Seat slide outer finisher (outside) 44. Seat slide outer finisher (inside) 45. Seat slide inner finisher

46. Seat control unit 47. Seat cushion side support bag 48. Seat harness

49. Seat cushion frame

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

1. Headrest 2. Front outer slide cover 3. Front inner slide cover

4. Rear outer slide cover 5. Rear inner slide cover 6. Seat cushion outer finisher

7. Seat slide and lifter switch knob 8. Seat reclining switch knob 9. Seat control switch

10. Seat cushion outer finisher inside (front)

11. Seat cushion outer finisher inside (rear)

12. Seat cushion inner finisher

13. Seat cushion inner finisher inside (front)

14. Seat cushion inner finisher inside (rear)

15. Slide switch escutcheon

16. Walk-in lever cap 17. Walk-in lever upper escutcheon 18. Headrest holder (free)

19. Headrest holder (locked) 20. Seatback lower panel 21. Side air bag module

22. Seatback trim 23. Seatback pad 24. Seatback silencer

JMJIA1022GB


FRONT SEAT

REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove the headrest.2. Remove the front slide cover.a. Front outer slide cover

• Slide the seat to the rearmost position.• Pull up the front edge of the front slide cover to release the

pawls.• Slide the front slide cover forward to release the pawls.

b. Front inner slide cover• Slide the seat to the rearmost position.• Pull up the front edge of the front slide cover to release the

pawls.• Slide the front slide cover forward to release the pawls.

3. Remove the mounting bolts on the front side of the front seat.4. Remove the rear slide cover.a. Rear outer slide cover

• Slide the seat to the foremost position.• Pull up the rear edge of the rear outer slide cover to release

the pawls.• Open the front end of the rear outer slide cover to release the

pawls.

25. Reclining device outer cover (out-side)

26. Reclining device outer cover (inside) 27. Reclining device inner cover (out-side)

28. Reclining device inner cover (inside) 29. Push nut 30. Walk-in lever

31. Reclining device wire 32. Slide switch (seatback) 33. Reclining and slide relay

34. Seatback frame 35. Seat cushion front finisher 36. Seat belt buckle

37. Seat cushion pad (front) 38. Seat slide outer finisher (outside) 39. Seat slide outer finisher (inside)

40. Seat slide inner finisher 41. Seat control unit 42. Seat harness

43. Seat cushion assembly


: Pawl

JMJIA0929ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0927ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0005ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

b. Rear inner slide cover• Slide the seat to the foremost position.• Pull up the rear edge of the rear inner slide cover to release

the pawls.• Slide the rear inner slide cover rearward to release the pawls.

5. Remove the mounting bolts on the rear side of the front seat.6. Set seatback in a standing position.7. Disconnect harness connector under the seat and remove harness securing clips.

CAUTION:Before removal, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and then wait for atleast 3 minutes.

8. Remove seat from the vehicle.CAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Before installation, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and then wait for

at least 3 minutes.• Clamp the harness in position.NOTE:After installing the front seat, perform additional service when removing battery negative terminal.(With auto-matic drive positioner model) Refer to ADP-9, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGA-TIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement". (Without automatic drive positioner model) Refer to SE-8,"ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Require-ment".

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004250198

SEATBACK

Disassembly

1. Remove the seat cushion outer finisher.• Remove the metal clips, clips and pawls, and then pull out seat

cushion outer finisher.

• Disconnect the seat control switch, lumbar support switch andside support switch harness connector.

• Remove the seat cushion outer finisher inside (front, rear).

: Pawl

JMJIA0928ZZ

: Clip

: Metal clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0937ZZ


FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >2. Remove the seat cushion inner finisher.
• Remove the seat cushion inner finisher inside (front, rear) byreleasing the metal clip and pull it up together with the cover.

• Remove the seat cushion inner finisher inside (front, rear) fromthe seat cushion inner finisher by releasing the pawls.

3. Remove the lumbar support lever knob.(Manual lumbar support model only.)Pull snap ring (1) upward, and remove lumbar support leverknob (2) from seatback frame.Using a hook and pick tool.

4. Remove the seatback trim and seatback pad.• Remove the pawls, and then pull out slide switch escutcheon

(1).

• Remove the walk-in lever cap.• Remove the screw (A) and pawls, and then walk-in lever

upper escutcheon (2).

: Metal clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0938ZZ

JMJIA0252ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0930ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0931ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• Remove the screw (B), and then pull the seatback trim fromthe walk-in lever (3) and walk-in lever lower escutcheon.

• Remove the seatback retainer, and then open the fastener.• Remove the headrest holder.

CAUTION:Before installing headrest holder check its orientation.(front/rear and right/left)

• Remove the seatback lower panel.• Remove the side air bag module.• Remove the side support hose joint (4) located backside the

seat cushion.(Side support model only.)• Disconnect the seatback heater unit harness connector (5).

• Remove the seatback trim and seatback pad from the seatback frame.• Remove the hog rings, and separate the seatback trim and seatback pad.

5. Remove the seatback silencer.6. Disconnect the harness connectors.

• Disconnect the side support unit harness connector (1) andremove the harness clamp.(Side support model only.)

• Disconnect the reclining and slide relay harness connector (2)and remove the harness clamp.

• Disconnect the power walk-in switch harness connector (3).• Disconnect the forward switch harness connector (4).• Disconnect the lumbar support motor harness connector (5)

and remove the harness clamp.(Power lumbar support modelonly.)

• Disconnect the reclining motor harness connector (6) andremove the harness clamp.

• Disconnect the slide switch (seatback) harness connector.(Passenger's seat only)

7. Remove the side support bag and unit.(Side support model only.)

JMJIA0932ZZ

PIIB4084J

JMJIA0933ZZ

JMJIA0934ZZ


FRONT SEAT
• Remove the pawls, and then remove side support bag (1).• Remove the side support unit.

8. Remove the seatback frame.Remove the seatback frame mounting bolt (A).

9. Remove the reclining device outer cover (front, rear).10. Remove the reclining device inner cover (front, rear).11. Remove the reclining device wire.

• Remove the push nut (1).• Remove the reclining device wire (2) from the seatback frame

and walk-in lever.

12. Remove the walk-in lever.

AssemblyAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.CAUTION:Install the hog rings of seatback trim in position, and then securely connect the trim or trim cord withthe pad side wire.

SEAT CUSHION

DisassemblyCAUTION:• Never disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly.• Always replace as an assembly.• For front passenger seat service parts, refer to the service part catalogue.1. Remove the seat cushion outer finisher.

: Pawl

JMJIA0935ZZ

JMJIA0936ZZ

JMJIA1023ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• Remove the metal clips, clips and pawls, and then pull out seatcushion outer finisher.

• Disconnect the seat control switch, lumbar support switch and side support switch harness connector.• Remove the seat cushion outer finisher inside (front, rear).

2. Remove the seat cushion inner finisher.• Remove the seat cushion inner finisher inside (front, rear) by

releasing the metal clip and pull it up together with the cover.• Remove the seat cushion inner finisher inside (front, rear) from

the seat cushion inner finisher by releasing the pawls.

3. Remove the seat cushion front finisher.Remove the metal clips, and then pull out seat cushion front fin-isher (1).

4. Remove the seatback assembly.• Remove the seatback lower panel.• Disconnect the side support unit harness connector (1) and

remove the harness clamp.(Side support model only.)• Disconnect the reclining and slide relay harness connector (2)

and remove the harness clamp.• Disconnect the power walk-in switch harness connector (3).• Disconnect the forward switch harness connector (4).• Disconnect the lumbar support motor harness connector (5)

and remove the harness clamp.(Power lumbar support modelonly.)

• Disconnect the reclining motor harness connector (6) andremove the harness clamp.

• Disconnect the slide switch (seatback) harness connector.(Passenger's seat only)

• Remove the side support hose joint located backside the seat cushion.(Side support model only.)• Remove the seat cushion retainer, and then side air bag harness clamp and seatback heater unit har-

ness connector.

: Clip

: Metal clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0937ZZ

: Metal clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0938ZZ

: Metal clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0017ZZ

JMJIA0934ZZ


FRONT SEAT
• Remove the seatback mounting bolts (A), and then removethe seatback assembly.

5. Remove the seat cushion pad (front). (Thigh extension model only.)• Remove the retainer.• Remove the seat cushion pad (front).

6. Remove the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad.• Remove the seat cushion trim wire (1) from the hook (2).

• Remove the clips (A).(Thigh extension model only.)

• Remove the seat cushion retainer.• Disconnect the seat cushion heater unit harness connector.• Remove the hog rings, and separate the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad.

7. Remove the side support bag.(Side support model only.)• Remove the hose clamp.

JMJIA0018ZZ

JMJIA0019ZZ

JMJIA0939ZZ

JMJIA0021ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• Remove the pawls, and then remove side support bag (1).

8. Remove the seat slide outer finisher.• Remove the metal clip and pawls, and then pull out seat slide outer finisher (outside).• Remove the metal clip, and then pull out seat slide outer finisher (inside).

9. Remove the seat slide inner finisher.Remove the metal clip, and then pull out seat slide inner finisher.

Assembly

1. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.CAUTION:Install the hog rings of seat cushion trim in position, and then securely connect the trim or trimcord with the pad side wire.

2. Front seat switch harness layout.a. Normal seat without lumbar support switch

Fix seat control harness (2) to seat cushion outer finisher (1) boss using a self locking band (5) as shownin the figure.

: Pawl

JMJIA0940ZZ

: Metal clip

JMJIA0023ZZ

: Metal clip

JMJIA0024ZZ

JMJIA2125ZZ


FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >b. Normal seat with lumbar support switch
Locate lumbar support switch harness (3) in the forehand position, cross seat control harness (2), and fixto seat cushion outer finisher (1) boss using a self locking band (5) as shown in the figure.

c. Sport seat without lumbar support switch

Locate side support switch harness (4) in the upper position of seat control harness (2) and fix to seatcushion outer finisher (1) boss using a self locking band (5) as shown in the figure.

d. Sport seat with lumbar support switch

Locate side support switch harness (4) in the upper position of seat control harness (2). Locate lumbarsupport switch harness (3) crossing in the forehand position, and fix to seat cushion outer finisher (1) bossusing a self locking band (5) as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:• Adjust and fix that the ejected length (a) of harness is 10 mm

(0.39 in) or less from the backside of connector for the seatcontrol harness (2) switch side.

• Fix lumbar support switch harness (3) and side supportswitch harness (4) without slack.

JMJIA2126ZZ

JMJIA2127ZZ

JMJIA2128ZZ

JMJIA2129ZZ


FRONT SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

• Locate lumbar support switch harness crossing in the upperposition, fix seat control harness connector (B), lumbar sup-port switch harness connector (C), and side support harnessconnector (D) as shown in the figure.

JMJIA2130ZZ


REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT


REAR SEAT


REMOVALCAUTION:

1. Seatback board 2. Seatback trim 3. Seatback pad

4. Seatback lock assembly 5. Seatback lock cable 6. Seatback frame

7. Center tray 8. Cup holder 9. Seat cushion trim

10. Seat cushion pad 11. Seatback side bracket 12. Seat cushion hook

13. Seat striker cover 14. Seat striker 15. Seat control lever escutcheon

16. Seatback control cable


JMJIA0925GB


REAR SEAT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove the seat cushion.

• Pull the seat cushion up, and then remove the seat cushionfrom the seat cushion hook.

• Remove the seat cushion from the vehicle.

2. Remove the seatback.• Remove the seatback control cable. Refer to SE-195, "Removal and Installation".• Remove the seatback mounting bolt.• Remove the seatback frame the vehicle.

3. Remove the seatback side bracket.• Remove the seatback side bracket mounting nuts.• Remove the seatback side bracket from the vehicle.

4. Remove the seat striker.• Remove the seat striker cover.• Remove the seat striker mounting bolt.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.


SEATBACK

Disassembly

1. Remove the seatback board.Remove the clips.

2. Remove the seatback trim and seatback pad.• Remove the hog rings, and remove the seatback retainer.• Remove the hog rings to separate the seatback trim and seatback pad.

3. Remove the seatback lock cable.• Remove the mounting bolt and cable clamp.• Remove the seatback lock cable from the seatback frame.

4. Remove the seatback lock assembly.• Remove the seatback lock assembly mounting bolt.• Remove the seatback lock assembly from the seatback frame.

AssemblyAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

PIIB8352J

: Clip

JMJIA0941ZZ


REAR SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >CAUTION:Install the hog rings of seatback trim in position, and then securely connect the trim or trim cord withthe seatback frame.
SEAT CUSHION

Disassembly

1. Remove the center tray.• Remove the clips (A) from the seat cushion backside, and

then remove pawls when pulling the center tray (1).

• Remove the center tray from the seat cushion assembly.2. Remove the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad.

Remove the hog rings to separate the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad.

AssemblyAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.CAUTION:Install the hog rings of seat cushion trim in position, and then securely connect the trim or trim cordwith the seat cushion pad wire.

JMJIA0944ZZ


SEATBACK CONTROL CABLE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SEATBACK CONTROL CABLE


Refer to SE-192, "Exploded View".


REMOVAL1. Remove the trunk front finisher upper. Refer to INT-27, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove the seatback control cable.

• Fold the seatback before.• Remove the clips (A), and then pull up the seatback lower

part.

• Remove the seatback control cable (1) from the seatbackframe.

• Remove the seatback control cable mounting nut (A).• Remove the seatback control cable (1) from the vehicle.


JMJIA0942ZZ

JMJIA0943ZZ

JMJIA0926ZZ


DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT




REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove driver seat (1). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installa-

tion".2. Remove mounting bolts (A).3. Remove driver seat control unit (2).

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Always clamp the harness to the right place.

JMJIA0230ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S





REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.NOTE:The same procedure is performed for driver side. Refer to SE-196, "Removal and Installation".







REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove the front seat. 2. Disconnect heated seat control unit connector.3. Remove the heated seat control unit from the heated seat control unit stay. Refer to SE-179, "Exploded

View".



AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT


Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".


REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove the battery negative terminal.2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-12,

"Removal and Installation".3. Remove the screws (A).4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1).


JMJIA0198ZZ


POWER SEAT SWITCH
POWER SEAT SWITCH


REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.NOTE:The same procedure is performed for driver side and passenger side.

1. Remove the seat cushion outer finisher (1). Refer to SE-182,"Removal and Installation".

2. Remove the screws (A).3. Remove the power seat switch (2) from the seat cushion outer

finisher.


JMJIA0194ZZ


SLIDING SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

SLIDING SWITCHSEATBACK

SEATBACK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004544446

REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.

1. Remove seatback pad. Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installa-tion".

2. Remove screws (A).3. Disconnect seat sliding switch (seatback) connector.4. Remove seat sliding switch (seatback) (2) from seatback frame

(1).


JMJIA1099ZZ


SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH
SIDE SUPPORT SWITCH


REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove seat cushion outer finisher (1). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove screws (A).3. Remove side support switch (2) from seat cushion outer finisher.


JMJIA0192ZZ


LUMBAR SUPPORT SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

E

N

O

P


S

LUMBAR SUPPORT SWITCH


REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.1. Remove seat cushion outer finisher (1). Refer to SE-182,

"Removal and Installation"2. Remove lumbar support switch (2).


: Pawl

JMJIA0193ZZ


HEATED SEAT SWITCH
HEATED SEAT SWITCH




REMOVALCAUTION:When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect from damage.1. Remove the console body assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation"2. Remove heated seat switch (1) from switch bracket (2) with flat-

bladed screwdriver (A).

NOTE:The same procedure is performed for passenger side.


: Pawl

JMJIA1577ZZ


ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

C

D

E

BSECTION PCS

A

POWER CONTROL SYSTEM

CS

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

O

P

N

CONTENTS

P

IPDM E/R


RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM .............................. 3System Diagram ........................................................3System Description ...................................................3Component Parts Location ........................................4

POWER CONTROL SYSTEM ............................. 5System Diagram ........................................................5System Description ...................................................5

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ................................ 6System Diagram ........................................................6System Description ...................................................6

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYS-TEM ..................................................................... 7

System Diagram ........................................................7System Description ...................................................7Component Parts Location ........................................8

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ...................... 9Diagnosis Description ...............................................9CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) .........................11


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............................14Description ..............................................................14DTC Logic ...............................................................14Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................14

B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK ...............15Description ..............................................................15DTC Logic ...............................................................15Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................15

B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK ..............16Description ..............................................................16DTC Logic ...............................................................16

Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....17Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17


IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRI-BUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ................18

Reference Value ......................................................18Wiring Diagram - IPDM E/R - ..................................25Fail-safe ...................................................................28DTC Index ...............................................................30

PRECAUTION ..............................................31

PRECAUTIONS .................................................31Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" .................................................................31Precaution for Battery Service .................................31Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ....31

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............32


Exploded View .........................................................32Removal and Installation .........................................32

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

BASIC INSPECTION ...................................34

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW .......34Work Flow ................................................................34

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................37

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ...................37System Description ..................................................37Component Parts Location ......................................39Component Description ..........................................40

PCS-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 41

COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 41COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 41

INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 42INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................... 42

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 46

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 46Description .............................................................. 46DTC Logic ............................................................... 46Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 47DTC Logic ............................................................... 47Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47Special Repair Requirement ................................... 47

B2553 IGNITION RELAY ................................... 48Description .............................................................. 48DTC Logic ............................................................... 48Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48

B260A IGNITION RELAY .................................. 50Description .............................................................. 50DTC Logic ............................................................... 50Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT ........................... 52Description .............................................................. 52DTC Logic ............................................................... 52Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52Component Inspection ............................................ 53

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 54Description .............................................................. 54DTC Logic ............................................................... 54Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54Component Inspection ............................................ 55

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 56Description .............................................................. 56DTC Logic ............................................................... 56Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56Component Inspection ............................................ 57

B2618 BCM ........................................................ 58Description .............................................................. 58DTC Logic ............................................................... 58Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ..... 59Description .............................................................. 59DTC Logic ............................................................... 59Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 61

BCM ........................................................................... 61BCM : Diagnosis Procedure .................................... 61

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ................. 62Description .............................................................. 62Component Function Check .................................. 62Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 62Component Inspection ............................................ 63

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSI-TION INDICATOR .............................................. 64

Description .............................................................. 64Component Function Check .................................. 64Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ................... 66Wiring Diagram - PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) - .............................................................. 66

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 72

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................. 72Reference Value ..................................................... 72Wiring Diagram - BCM - .......................................... 95Fail-safe ................................................................ 100DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 102DTC Index ............................................................ 104

PRECAUTION ...........................................107

PRECAUTIONS ................................................107Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ............................................................... 107Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-tion after Battery Disconnect ................................. 107

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ...........................109

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................109

Description ............................................................ 109Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 109

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSI-TION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ..110

Description ............................................................ 110Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............111

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................111Exploded View ...................................................... 111Removal and Installation ....................................... 111

PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ................112Exploded View ...................................................... 112Removal and Installation ....................................... 112


CS

RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONRELAY CONTROL SYSTEM



IPDM E/R activates the internal control circuit to perform the relay ON-OFF control according to the input sig-nals from various sensors and the request signals received from control units via CAN communication.CAUTION:IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.

JPMIA1564GB


[IPDM E/R]RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM


NOTE:

BCM controls the starter relay.


Control relay Input/output Transmit unit Control partReference

page

• Headlamp low relay• Headlamp high relay

• Low beam request signal• High beam request signal

BCM (CAN)• Headlamp low• Headlamp high

EXL-8

Front fog lamp relay Front fog light request signal BCM (CAN) Front fog lamp EXL-22

Tail lamp relay Position light request signal BCM (CAN)

• Parking lamp• Side marker lamp• License plate lamp• Tail lamp

EXL-26

Illuminations INL-12

• Front wiper relay• Front wiper high relay

Front wiper request signal BCM (CAN)Front wiper WW-5

Front wiper stop position signal Front wiper motor

• Horn relay 1• Horn relay 2

• Theft warning horn request signal• Horn reminder signal

BCM (CAN)• Horn (low)• Horn (high)

SEC-23

• Starter relayNOTE

• Starter control relay

Starter control relay signal BCM (CAN)

Starter motorSEC-113,SEC-111

Steering lock unit condition signal Steering lock unit

Starter relay control signalTCM

Clutch interlock switch

Steering lock relay

Steering lock relay signal BCM (CAN)

Steering lock unit SEC-104Steering lock unit condition signal Steering lock unit

A/T shift selector (Detention switch) signal

A/T shift selector(Detention switch)

A/C relay A/C compressor request signal ECM (CAN)A/C compressor(magnet clutch)

HAC-38

Ignition relay

Ignition switch ON signal BCM (CAN)

Ignition relay PCS-15Vehicle speed signalUnified meter and A/C amp. (CAN)

Push-button ignition switch signal Push-button ignition switch

1. IPDM E/R

A. Engine room dash panel (RH)

JPMIA0505ZZ


CS

POWER CONTROL SYSTEM[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


POWER CONTROL SYSTEM



COOLING FAN CONTROLIPDM E/R outputs pulse duty signal (PWM signal) to the cooling fan control module according to the status ofthe cooling fan speed request signal received from ECM via CAN communication. Refer to EC-74, "SystemDiagram".

ALTERNATOR CONTROLIPDM E/R outputs power generation command signal (PWM signal) to the alternator according to the status ofthe power generation command value signal received from ECM via CAN communication. Refer to CHG-8,"System Diagram".

JSMIA0004GB


[IPDM E/R]SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM


SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM



• IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM viaCAN communication. Refer to MWI-23, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Diagram".

• IPDM E/R reads the status of the hood switch and transmits the hood switch signal to BCM via CAN commu-nication. Refer to SEC-125, "Description".

• IPDM E/R receives the rear window defogger control signal from BCM via CAN communication and trans-mits it to ECM and AV control unit via CAN communication. Refer to DEF-4, "System Diagram".

JSMIA0005GB


CS

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM



OUTLINE• IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption accord-

ing to the vehicle status. • IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN com-

munication.

Normal mode (wake-up)- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.

Low power consumption mode (sleep)- Low power consumption control is active.- CAN transmission is stopped.

SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION• IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the

conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communica-tion.

- Outputting signals to actuators- Switches or relays operating- Hood switch status is kept 50 ms or less.- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.• IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep

wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.

WAKE-UP OPERATION• IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep

wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits asleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start.

- Ignition switch ON- The hood switch status changes.- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.

JPMIA0069GB


[IPDM E/R]POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM



1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Unified meter and A/C amp.

4. Driver seat control unit

A. Dash side lower (passenger side) B. Engine room dash panel (RH) C. Behind Cluster lid C

D. Backside of the seat cushion (driver seat)

JPMIA0623ZZ


CS

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)

Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004247997

AUTO ACTIVE TEST

DescriptionIn auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.• Oil pressure warning lamp• Front wiper (LO, HI)• Parking lamps• License plate lamps• Side maker lamps• Tail lamps• Front fog lamps• Headlamps (LO, HI)• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)• Cooling fan (cooling fan control module)

Operation Procedure

1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiperoperation)NOTE:When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the front door switch (driver side) 10 times.

Then turn the ignition switch OFF.CAUTION:Close passenger door.

4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active teststarts.

5. The oil pressure warning lamp starts blinking when the auto active test starts.6. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.NOTE:When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.CAUTION:• If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to DLK-62,

"Component Function Check".• Do not start the engine.

Inspection in Auto Active Test ModeWhen auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times.

*: Outputs duty ratio of 50% for 5 seconds → duty ratio of 100% for 5 seconds on the cooling fan control module.

Operation sequence

Inspection location Operation

1 Oil pressure warning lamp Blinks continuously during operation of auto active test

2 Front wiper LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds

3

• Parking lamps• License plate lamps• Side maker lamps• Tail lamps• Front fog lamps

10 seconds

4 Headlamps LO ⇔ HI 5 times

5 A/C compressor (magnet clutch) ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

6* Cooling fan MID for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds


[IPDM E/R]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Concept of auto active test

• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communica-tion. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the autoactive test starts successfully.

• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.

Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode

JPMIA0009GB

Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause

Any of the following components do not operate• Parking lamps• License plate lamps• Side maker lamps• Tail lamps• Front fog lamps• Headlamp (HI, LO)• Front wiper (HI, LO)

Perform auto active test.Does the applicable system operate?

YES BCM signal input circuit

NO

• Lamp or motor• Lamp or motor ground cir-

cuit• Harness or connector be-

tween IPDM E/R and appli-cable system

• IPDM E/R

A/C compressor does not operatePerform auto active test.Does the magnet clutch oper-ate?

YES

• Unified meter and A/C amp. signal input circuit

• CAN communication signal between unified meter and A/C amp. and ECM

• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Magnet clutch• Harness or connector be-

tween IPDM E/R and mag-net clutch

• IPDM E/R

Oil pressure warning lamp does not operatePerform auto active test.Does the oil pressure warning lamp blink?

YES

• Harness or connector be-tween IPDM E/R and oil pressure switch

• Oil pressure switch• IPDM E/R

NO

• CAN communication signal between IPDM E/R and BCM

• CAN communication signal between BCM and unified meter and A/C amp.

• Combination meter


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000004247998

APPLICATION ITEMCONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTRefer to PCS-30, "DTC Index".

DATA MONITORMonitor item

Cooling fan does not operatePerform auto active test.Does the cooling fan operate?

YES

• ECM signal input circuit• CAN communication signal

between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Cooling fan• Harness or connector be-

tween cooling fan and cool-ing fan control module

• Cooling fan control module• Harness or connector be-

tween IPDM E/R and cool-ing fan control module

• Cooling fan relay• Harness or connector be-

tween IPDM E/R and cool-ing fan relay

• IPDM E/R

Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause

Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification Allows confirmation of IPDM E/R part number.

Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by IPDM E/R.

Data Monitor Displays the real-time input/output data from IPDM E/R input/output data.

Active Test IPDM E/R can provide a drive signal to electronic components to check their operations.

CAN Diag Support Monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.

Monitor Item[Unit]

MAIN SIG-NALS

Description

RAD FAN REQ[%]

× Displays the value of the cooling fan speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication.

AC COMP REQ[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the A/C compressor request signal received from ECM via CAN communication.

TAIL&CLR REQ[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

HL LO REQ[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the low beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

HL HI REQ[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the high beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

FR FOG REQ[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

FR WIP REQ[Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]

× Displays the status of the front wiper request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

WIP AUTO STOP[STOP P/ACT P]

× Displays the status of the front wiper auto stop signal judged by IPDM E/R.

WIP PROT[Off/BLOCK]

× Displays the status of the front wiper fail-safe operation judged by IPDM E/R.


[IPDM E/R]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)


ACTIVE TESTTest item

IGN RLY1 -REQ[Off/On]

Displays the status of the ignition switch ON signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

IGN RLY[Off/On]

× Displays the status of the ignition relay judged by IPDM E/R.

PUSH SW[Off/On]

Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch judged by IPDM E/R.

INTER/NP SW[Off/On]

Displays the status of the clutch interlock switch (M/T models) or shift position (A/T models) judged by IPDM E/R.

ST RLY CONT[Off/On]

Displays the status of the starter relay status signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

IHBT RLY -REQ[Off/On]

Displays the status of the starter control relay signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

ST/INHI RLY[Off/ ST ON/INHI ON/UNKWN]

Displays the status of the starter relay and starter control relay judged by IPDM E/R.

DETENT SW[Off/On]

Displays the status of the A/T shift selector (detention switch) judged by IPDM E/R.

S/L RLY -REQ[Off/On]

Displays the status of the steering lock relay request received from BCM via CAN communication.

S/L STATE[LOCK/UNLOCK/UNKWN]

Displays the status of the steering lock judged by IPDM E/R.

DTRL REQ[Off/On]

NOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

OIL P SW[Open/Close]

Displays the status of the oil pressure switch judged by IPDM E/R.

HOOD SW[Off/On]

Displays the status of the hood switch judged by IPDM E/R.

HL WASHER REQ[Off/On]


THFT HRN REQ[Off/On]

Displays the status of the theft warning horn request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.

HORN CHIRP[Off/On]

Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BCM via CAN com-munication.

CRNRNG LMP REQ[Off/On]


Monitor Item[Unit]

MAIN SIG-NALS

Description

Test item Operation Description

CORNERING LAMP

OffNOTE:The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.

LH

RH

HORN On Operates horn relay 1 and horn relay 2 for 20 ms.

FRONT WIPER

Off OFF

Lo Operates the front wiper relay.

Hi Operates the front wiper relay and front wiper high relay.

MOTOR FAN

1 OFF

2 Outputs 50% pulse duty signal (PWM signal) to the cooling fan control module.




CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


HEAD LAMP WASHER OnNOTE:The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.

EXTERNAL LAMPS

Off OFF

TAIL Operates the tail lamp relay.

Lo Operates the headlamp low relay.

HiOperates the headlamp low relay and ON/OFF the headlamp high relay at 1 sec-ond intervals.

Fog Operates the front fog lamp relay.

Test item Operation Description


[IPDM E/R]U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT




CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modernvehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links withother control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connectedwith 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with lesswiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of IPDM E/R.Is DTC “U1000” displayed?YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITWhen IPDM E/R cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more

In CAN communication system, any item (or items) of the following listed below is malfunctioning.• Transmission• Receiving (ECM)• Receiving (BCM)• Receiving (Unified meter and A/C amp.)


CS

B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK


• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN com-munication.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or less.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/Camp.(Emergency OFF)

- Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.- Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds.NOTE:The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switchis pressed.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Erase “Self Diagnostic Result” of IPDM E/R.3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 1 second or more. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” again.Is DTC “B2098” displayed?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

DTCCONSULT-III dis-play description

DTC Detection Condition Possible causes

B2098 IGN RELAY ONThe ignition relay ON is detected for 1 second at ignition switch OFF(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it)

Ignition relay malfunction


[IPDM E/R]B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK


B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK


• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN com-munication.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or less.

• Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/Camp.(Emergency OFF)

- Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.- Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds.NOTE:The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switchis pressed.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:

When IPDM E/R power supply voltage is low (Approx. 7 - 8 V for about 1 second), the “DTC: B2099” may be detected.


1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Erase “Self Diagnostic Result”.3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.4. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” again.Is DTC “B2099” displayed?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

DTCCONSULT-III dis-play description

DTC Detection Condition Possible causes

B2099 IGN RELAY OFFThe ignition relay OFF is detected for 1 second at ignition switch ON(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it)

Ignition relay malfunction


CS

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P




1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible links are not blown.

Is the fuse fusing?YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is



1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and the ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the harness or connector.


Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and the ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair the harness or connector.

Signal name Fuses and fusible link No.

Battery power supply

C

50

51

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)(−)

IPDM E/R

Connector TerminalGround

E4 1 Battery voltage

IPDM E/R

Ground


E5 12Existed

E6 41


[IPDM E/R]IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)


ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONIPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINEROOM)




RAD FAN REQ Engine idle speed

Changes depending on engine coolant temperature, air conditioner operation status, vehicle speed, etc.

0 - 100 %

AC COMP REQ Engine running

A/C switch OFF Off

A/C switch ON(Compressor is operating)

On

TAIL&CLR REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND, HI or AUTO (Light is illuminated) On

HL LO REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch 2ND HI or AUTO (Light is illuminated) On

HL HI REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch HI On

FR FOG REQLighting switch 2ND orAUTO (Light is illuminated)

Front fog lamp switch OFF Off

• Front fog lamp switch ON• Daytime running light activated

(Only for Canada)On

FR WIP REQ Ignition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF Stop

Front wiper switch INT 1LOW

Front wiper switch LO Low

Front wiper switch HI Hi

WIP AUTO STOP Ignition switch ON

Front wiper stop position STOP P

Any position other than front wiper stop position

ACT P

WIP PROT Ignition switch ON

Front wiper operates normally Off

Front wiper stops at fail-safe opera-tion

BLOCK

IGN RLY1 -REQIgnition switch OFF or ACC Off

Ignition switch ON On

IGN RLYIgnition switch OFF or ACC Off

Ignition switch ON On

PUSH SWRelease the push-button ignition switch Off

Press the push-button ignition switch On

INTER/NP SW

Ignition switch ON

Selector lever in any position other than P or N (A/T models) Off

Release clutch pedal (M/T models)

Ignition switch ON

Selector lever in P or N position (A/T models) On

Depress clutch pedal (M/T models)


CS

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


ST RLY CONTIgnition switch ON Off

At engine cranking On

IHBT RLY -REQIgnition switch ON Off

At engine cranking On

ST/INHI RLY

Ignition switch ON Off

At engine cranking INHI ON → ST ON

The status of starter relay or starter control relay cannot be recognized by the battery voltage malfunction, etc. when the starter relay is ON and the starter control relay is OFF

UNKWN

DETENT SW

Ignition switch ON

• Press the selector button with se-lector lever in P position

• Selector lever in any position oth-er than P

Off

Release the selector button with selector lever in P positionNOTE: Fixed On for M/T models

On

S/L RLY -REQ

None of the conditions below are present Off

• Open the driver door after the ignition switch is turned OFF (for a few seconds)

• Press the push-button ignition switch when the steering lock is activat-ed

• Depress the clutch pedal when the steering lock is activated

On

S/L STATE

Steering lock is activated LOCK

Steering lock is deactivated UNLOCK

[DTC: B210A] is detected UNKWN

DTRL REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

OIL P SWIgnition switch OFF, ACC or engine running Open

Ignition switch ON Close

HOOD SWClose the hood Off

Open the hood On

HL WASHER REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

THFT HRN REQ

Not operation Off

• Panic alarm is activated• Horn is activated with VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYS-

TEMOn

HORN CHIRPNot operating Off

Door locking with Intelligent Key (horn chirp mode) On

CRNRNG LMP REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off





TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JSMIA0001ZZ


Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)Signal nameInput/ Output+ −

1(W)

Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

2(L)


4(V)

Ground Front wiper LO OutputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF 0 V

Front wiper switch LO Battery voltage

5(L)

Ground Front wiper HI OutputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF 0 V

Front wiper switch HI Battery voltage

7(R)

GroundTail, license plate lamps & illuminations

OutputIgnition switch ON

Lighting switch OFF 0 V

Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage

11(BR)

GroundSteering lock unit power supply

Output

Ignition switch OFF

A few seconds after open-ing the driver door

Battery voltage

Ignition switch LOCK

Press the push-button ig-nition switch

Battery voltage

Ignition switch ACC or ON 0 V

12(B/W)

Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0 V


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


13(Y)

Ground Fuel pump power supply Output

Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON

0 V

• Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON

• Engine runningBattery voltage

16(LG)

Ground Front wiper auto stop InputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper stop position 0 V

Any position other than front wiper stop position

Battery voltage

19(W)

Ground Ignition relay power supply OutputIgnition switch OFF 0 V

Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

25(G)



26*1

(R)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output

Ignition switch OFF 0 V


27(O)

Ground Ignition relay monitor InputIgnition switch OFF or ACC Battery voltage

Ignition switch ON 0 V

28(L)

GroundPush-button ignition switch

InputPress the push-button ignition switch 0 V

Release the push-button ignition switch Battery voltage

30(GR)

Ground Starter relay control Input

A/T mod-els

Selector lever in any posi-tion other than P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

0 V

Selector lever P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

Battery voltage

M/T mod-els

Release the clutch pedal 0 V

Depress the clutch pedal Battery voltage

32(V)

GroundSteering lock unit condi-tion-1

InputSteering lock is activated 0 V

Steering lock is deactivated Battery voltage

33(P)

GroundSteering lock unit condi-tion-2

InputSteering lock is activated Battery voltage

Steering lock is deactivated 0 V

36(G)


39(P)

— CAN-LInput/ Output

— —

40(L)

— CAN-HInput/ Output

— —

41(B/W)


42(Y)

Ground Cooling fan relay control InputIgnition switch OFF or ACC 0 V

Ignition switch ON 0.7 V

43*2

(SB)Ground

A/T shift selector(Detention switch)

InputIgnition switch ON

Press the selector button (selector lever P)

Battery voltage

• Selector lever in any po-sition other than P

• Release the selector button (selector lever P)

0 V

44(W)

Ground Horn relay control InputThe horn is deactivated Battery voltage

The horn is activated 0 V


Description

ConditionValue





45(G)

Ground Anti theft horn relay control InputThe horn is deactivated Battery voltage

The horn is activated 0 V

46

(W)*2

(P)*3Ground Starter relay control Input

A/T mod-els

Selector lever in any posi-tion other than P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

0 V

Selector lever P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

Battery voltage

M/T mod-els

Release the clutch pedal 0 V

Depress the clutch pedal Battery voltage

48(BR)

Ground A/C relay power supply OutputEngine running

A/C switch OFF 0 V

A/C switch ON(A/C compressor is oper-ating)

Battery voltage

49(O)

Ground ECM relay power supply Output

Ignition switch OFF(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)

0 V

• Ignition switch ON• Ignition switch OFF

(For a few seconds after turning igni-tion switch OFF)

Battery voltage

51(Y)



53(W)

Ground ECM relay power supply Output


0 V



Battery voltage

54(P)

GroundThrottle control motor re-lay power supply

Output


0 V



Battery voltage

55(SB)

Ground ECM power supply Output Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

56(LG)



57(G)



58*2

(L)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output



69(BR)

Ground ECM relay control Output


Battery voltage



0 - 1.5 V


Description

ConditionValue



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


70(O)

GroundThrottle control motor re-lay control

OutputIgnition switch ON → OFF

0 -1.0 V ↓

Battery voltage↓

0 V

Ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0 V

73*3

(P)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output



74(G)



75(SB)

Ground Oil pressure switch InputIgnition switch ON

Engine stopped 0 V

Engine running Battery voltage

76(Y)

GroundPower generation com-mand signal

Output

Ignition switch ON

6.3 V

40% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “AL-TERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”

3.8 V

80% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “AL-TERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”

1.4 V

77(R)

Ground Fuel pump relay control Output

• Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON

• Engine running0 - 1.0 V

Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

80(W)

Ground Starter motor Output At engine cranking Battery voltage

83(R)

Ground Headlamp LO (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON


Lighting switch 2ND Battery voltage

84(P)

Ground Headlamp LO (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON


Lighting switch 2ND Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0001GB

JPMIA0002GB

JPMIA0003GB




*1: Only for the models with ICC system

*2: A/T models only

*3: M/T models only

86(W)

Ground Front fog lamp (RH) OutputLighting switch 2ND

Front fog lamp switch OFF 0 V

• Front fog lamp switch ON

• Daytime running light activated (Only for Can-ada)

Battery voltage

87(L)

Ground Front fog lamp (LH) OutputLighting switch 2ND

Front fog lamp switch OFF 0 V

• Front fog lamp switch ON

• Daytime running light activated (Only for Can-ada)

Battery voltage

88(G)

GroundWasher pump power sup-ply

Output Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

89(BR)

Ground Headlamp HI (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON


• Lighting switch HI• Lighting switch PASS

Battery voltage

90(LG)

Ground Headlamp HI (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON


• Lighting switch HI• Lighting switch PASS

Battery voltage

91(P)

Ground Parking lamp (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON



92(O)

Ground Parking lamp (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON



97(V)

Ground Cooling fan control Output Engine idling 0 - 5 V

104(LG)

Ground Hood switch InputClose the hood Battery voltage

Open the hood 0 V


Description

ConditionValue



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Wiring Diagram - IPDM E/R - INFOID:0000000004248010

JCMWM3058GB




JCMWM3059GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3060GB




Fail-safe INFOID:0000000004468118

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROLWhen CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CANcommunication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.

If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM

JCMWM3061GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. • IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation

coil circuit.• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to

alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

FRONT WIPER CONTROLIPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiperafter repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times.

Control part Fail-safe operation

Cooling fan• Outputs the pulse duty signal (PWM signal) 100% when the ignition switch is turned

ON• Outputs the pulse duty signal (PWM signal) 0% when the ignition switch is turned OFF

A/C compressor A/C relay OFF

Alternator Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0%

Control part Fail-safe operation

Headlamp• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF• Headlamp high relay OFF

• Parking lamps• Side maker lamp• License plate lamps• Illuminations• Tail lamps

• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF

Front wiper

• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.

• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating.

Horn Horn relay OFF

Ignition relay The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.

Starter motor Starter control relay OFF

Steering lock unit Steering lock relay OFF

Voltage judgment

IPDM E/R judgment OperationIgnition relay contact side

Ignition relay excitation coil side

ON ON Ignition relay ON normal —

OFF OFF Ignition relay OFF normal —

ON OFF Ignition relay ON stuck• Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON”• Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 min-

utes

OFF ON Ignition relay OFF stuck Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF”

Ignition switch Front wiper switch Front wiper stop position signal

ON

OFFThe front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.

ONThe front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.



< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >NOTE:This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.

STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONIPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remainsactive for 90 seconds.


NOTE:• The details of time display are as follows.- CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.- PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.• IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame data).- The number is 0 when is detected now.- The number increases like 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF →

ON.- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.

×: Applicable

CONSULT display Fail-safe Refer to

No DTC is detected.further testingmay be required.

— —

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT × PCS-14

B2098: IGN RELAY ON × PCS-15

B2099: IGN RELAY OFF — PCS-16

B2108: STRG LCK RELAY ON — SEC-104

B2109: STRG LCK RELAY OFF — SEC-106

B210A: STRG LCK STATE SW — SEC-107

B210B: START CONT RLY ON — SEC-111

B210C: START CONT RLY OFF — SEC-112

B210D: STARTER RELAY ON — SEC-113

B210E: STARTER RELAY OFF — SEC-114

B210F: INTRLCK/PNP SW ON — SEC-116

B2110: INTRLCK/PNP SW OFF — SEC-118


CS

PRECAUTIONS[IPDM E/R]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< PRECAUTION >












Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004684062

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, coverthe lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.

PIIB3706J




REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONIPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINEROOM)



CAUTION:IPDM E/R integrated relays are not serviceable parts, and must not be removed from the unit.

REMOVAL1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.2. Remove the cowl top cover (RH). Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded

View".3. Pull up the IPDM E/R assembly while pressing the pawls (A) on

the back of the IPDM E/R cover B (1).

1. IPDM E/R cover A 2. IPDM E/R 3. IPDM E/R cover B

4. Bracket

JPMIA0058ZZ

JPMIA0059ZZ


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >4. Remove the IPDM E/R cover A (1). While pressing the pawls (A)

at the lower end of the IPDM E/R cover A5. Disconnect the harness connector and remove the IPDM E/R

(2).

6. Remove the bolts (A) and remove the bracket (1) from the vehi-cle.


JPMIA0060ZZ

JPMIA1240ZZ


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW




OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW

JMKIA3449GB


CS

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment whenthe incident/malfunction occurred).

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

1. Check DTC for BCM and IPDM E/R.2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out with CONSULT-III.)- Erase DTC.- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.3. Check related service bulletins for information.Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4.Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Confirm the symptom described by the customer.Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real time diagnosis results.Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Confirm the symptom described by the customer.Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR ” mode and check real time diagnosis results.Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 6.


Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again.At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time.If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to SEC-183, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart", and determine troublediagnosis order.NOTE:Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included in Service Manual. Thissimplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check.If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC ConfirmationProcedure.Is DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Detect malfunctioning system according to PCS-109, "Description" based on the confirmed symptom in step4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.

>> GO TO 7.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.NOTE:The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is alsorequired for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure.


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW

< BASIC INSPECTION >Is malfunctioning part detected?YES >> GO TO 8.NO >> Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III.

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-

ment.3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.

>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Checkagain, and then check that the malfunction has been repaired securely.When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check thatthe symptom is not detected.Does the symptom reappear?YES (DTC is detected)>>GO TO 7.YES (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.NO >> INSPECTION END


CS

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONPOWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM


SYSTEM DESCRIPTION• PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) is the system that BCM controls with the operation of the push-

button ignition switch and performs the power distribution to each power circuit. This system is used insteadof the mechanical power supply changing mechanism with the operation of the conventional key cylinder.

• The push-button ignition switch can be operated when Intelligent Key is in the following condition. Refer toEngine Start Function for details.

- Intelligent Key is in the detection area of the interior antenna- Insert Intelligent Key in to the key slot• The push-button ignition switch operation is input to BCM as a signal. BCM changes the power supply posi-

tion according to the status and operates the following relays to supply power to each power circuit.- Ignition relay (inside IPDM E/R)- Ignition relay (inside fuse block)- ACC relay- Blower fan relay

NOTE:The engine switch operation changes due to the conditions of brake pedal, selector lever and vehicle speed.

• The power supply position can be confirmed with the lighting of the indicators near the push-button ignitionswitch.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEMWhen all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supplyto prevent battery discharge.• The ignition switch is in the ACC position• All doors are closed• Selector lever is in the P position

Reset Condition of Battery Saver SystemA/T modelsIn order to prevent the battery from discharging, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply when alldoors are closed, the selector lever is on P position and the ignition switch is left on ACC position for 1 hour. Ifany of the following conditions are met the battery saver system is released and the steering will change auto-matically to lock position from OFF position.• Opening any door• Operating with request switch on door lock• Operating with Intelligent Key on door lockPress push-button ignition switch and ignition switch will change to ACC position from OFF position.M/T modelsIf any of the conditions above is met the battery saver system is released but the steering will not lock.In this case, the steering operation OFF to LOCK is prohibited.

STEERING LOCK OPERATIONSteering is locked by steering lock unit when ignition switch is in the OFF position, selector lever is in the Pposition and any of the following conditions are met.• Opening door• Closing door• Door is locked with request switch• Door is locked with Intelligent Key

POWER SUPPLY POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERA-TIONThe power supply position changing operation can be performed with the following operations.NOTE:• When an Intelligent Key is within the detection area of inside key antenna and when it is inserted to the key

slot, it is equivalent to the operations below.• When starting the engine, the BCM monitors under the engine start conditions,

A/T models


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >- Brake pedal operating condition- A/T selector lever position- Vehicle speed

M/T models- Clutch pedal operating condition- Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed: less than 4km/h (2.5 MPH).

Vehicle speed: 4km/h (2.5 MPH) or more.

Emergency stop operation

• Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.

• Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times or more within 1.5 seconds.

Power supply position

Engine start/stop conditionPush-button ignition switch operation fre-

quency

A/T models M/T models

Selector lever positionBrake pedal operation

conditionClutch pedal operation

condition

LOCK → ACC — Not depressed Not depressed 1

LOCK → ACC → ON — Not depressed Not depressed 2

LOCK → ACC → ON → OFF

— Not depressed Not depressed 3

LOCK → STARTACC → STARTON → START

P or N position Depressed Depressed 1

Engine is running → OFF — — — 1

Power supply position

Engine start/stop conditionPush-button ignition switch operation fre-

quency

A/T models M/T models

Selector lever positionBrake pedal operation

conditionClutch pedal operation

condition

Engine is running → ACC — — —Emergency stop oper-

ation

Engine stall return operation while driving

N position Not depressed Depressed 1


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



1. BCM M118, M119, M121, M122, M123

2. IPDM E/R E5, E6, E7 3. Unified meter and A/C AMP. M66, M67

4. Push button ignition switch M50 5. TCM F157 6. Combination meter (Key warning lamp) M53

7. Ignition relay 8. Accessory relay 9. Blower relay

JMMIA0004ZZ





10. Clutch interlock switch E111 11. Stop lamp switch E110 12. ICC brake hold relay

A. Dash side lower (Passenger side). B. Engine room dash panel (RH). C. Behind cluster lid C.

D. Inside of A/T (built into A/T). E. View with dash side LH removed. F View with instrument driver lower cover removed.

G. View with instrument driver lower cover removed.

H. Left view of engine room

BCM Reference

IPDM E/R PCS-3

Ignition relay (Built-in IPDM E/R) PCS-16

Ignition relay (Built-in fuse block) PCS-48

Accessory relay PCS-52

Blower relay PCS-54

Stop lamp switch SEC-59

Transmission range switch (A/T models) SEC-73

Clutch inter lock switch (M/T models) SEC-116

Push-button ignition switch SEC-61


CS

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)COMMON ITEM

COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000004679451

APPLICATION ITEMCONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATIONBCM can perform the following functions for each system.NOTE:It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.

×: Applicable item

NOTE:

*: This item is displayed, but is not used.

FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays onCONSULT-III.

Diagnosis mode Function Description

Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.

Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.

CAN Diag Support MonitorMonitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Refer to CONSULT-III opera-tion manual.

Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed.

Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.

Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.

Configuration This function is not used even though it is displayed.

System Sub system selection itemDiagnosis mode

Work Support Data Monitor Active Test

Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×

Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×

Warning chime BUZZER × ×

Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×

Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×

Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×

— AIR CONDITONER*

• Intelligent Key system• Engine start system

INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×

Combination switch COMB SW ×

Body control system BCM ×

IVIS - NATS IMMU × ×

Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×

Trunk lid open TRUNK × ×

Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × ×

RAP system RETAINED PWR* ×

Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×

TPMS TPMS (AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) × × ×


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)


INTELLIGENT KEY

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000004679450

WORK SUPPORT

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Vehicle Condition

SLEEP>LOCK

Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected

While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)

SLEEP>OFFWhile turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.)

LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from “LOCK” to “ACC”

ACC>ON While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “IGN”

RUN>ACCWhile turning power supply position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle is stopping and selector lever is except P position.)

CRANK>RUNWhile turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From cranking up the engine to run it)

RUN>URGENTWhile turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-gency stop operation)

ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “OFF”

OFF>LOCK While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “LOCK”

OFF>ACC While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “ACC”

ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”

OFF>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCK>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCKPower supply position is “LOCK” (Ignition switch OFF with steer-ing is locked.)

OFFPower supply position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.)

ACC Power supply position is “ACC” (Ignition switch ACC)

ONPower supply position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)

ENGINE RUNPower supply position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)

CRANKING Power supply position is “CRANKING” (At engine cranking)

IGN Counter 0 - 39

The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition

whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.

Monitor item Description

CONFIRM KEY FOB ID It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode.

AUTO LOCK SET

Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode.• MODE 1: 1 minute• MODE 2: 5 minutes• MODE 3: 30 seconds• MODE 4: 2 minutes


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


SELF-DIAG RESULTRefer to DLK-161, "DTC Index".

DATA MONITOR

LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEYDoor lock/unlock function by door request switch (driver side and passenger side) mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) in this mode.

ENGINE START BY I-KEYEngine start function mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPENBuzzer reminder function mode by trunk opener request switch can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

PANIC ALARM SET

Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key remote control button can be selected from the following with this mode. • MODE 1: 0.5 sec.• MODE 2: Non-operation• MODE 3: 1.5 sec.

PW DOWN SET

Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode. • MODE 1: 3 sec.• MODE 2: Non-operation• MODE 3: 5 sec.

TRUNK OPEN DELAY

Trunk button pressing on Intelligent Key button can be selected as per the following in this mode. • MODE 1: Press and hold• MODE 2: Press twice• MODE 3: Press and hold, or press twice

LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARNIntelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTIKey reminder function mode can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

Hazard reminder function mode can be selected from the following with this mode.• LOCK ONLY: Door lock operation only• UNLOCK ONLY: Door unlock operation only• LOCK/UNLOCK: Lock/unlock operation• OFF: Non-operation

ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK

Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch (driver side and pas-senger side) can be selected from the following with this mode. • Horn chirp: Sound horn• Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer• OFF: Non-operation

ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCKBuzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT

Starter motor can operate during the times below.• 70 msec• 100 msec• 200 msec

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis.

HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCKHorn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be changed to operate (ON) or not operate (OFF) with this mode.

Monitor item Description

Monitor Item Condition

REQ SW -DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side).

REQ SW -AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side).

REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener request switch.

PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch.

IGN RLY2 -F/B Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition relay 2.


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)


*1: It is displayed but does not operate on M/T models.

*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.

ACTIVE TEST

ACC RLY-FBNOTE:This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of clutch switch.

BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [ON/OFF]*2 condition of brake switch power supply.

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of brake switch.

DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position.

SFT PN/N SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P or N position.

S/L -LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK).

S/L -UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK).

S/L RELAY -F/B Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock relay.

UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver door UNLOCK status.

PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch.

IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition relay 1.

DETE SW -IPDM Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position.

SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P or N position.

SFT P -MET Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P position.

SFT N -MET Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of N position.

ENGINE STATE Indicates [STOP/STALL/CRANK/RUN] condition of engine states.

S/L LOCK-IPDM Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK).

S/L UNLK-IPDM Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK).

S/L RELAY-REQ Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of steering lock relay.

VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h].

VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [Km/h].

DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLOCK] condition of driver side door status.

DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLOCK] condition of passenger side door status.

ID OK FLAG Indicates [SET/RESET] condition of key ID.

PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [SET/RESET] condition of engine start possibility.

PRMT RKE STRTNOTE:This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

KEY SW -SLOT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key slot.

TRNK/HAT MNTR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk lid.

RKE-LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-TR/BD Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of TRUNK OPEN signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-PANIC Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key.

RKE-P/W OPEN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of P/W DOWN signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE OPE COUN1When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelli-gent Key, the numerical value start changing.

RKE OPE COUN2NOTE:This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

Monitor Item Condition


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



BATTERY SAVERThis test is able to check interior room lamp operation.The interior room lamp is activated after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

PW REMOTO DOWN SETThis test is able to check power window down operation.The power window down is activated after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

OUTSIDE BUZZERThis test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation.The Intelligent Key warning buzzer is activated after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

INSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation.• Take away warning chime sounds when “TAKE OUT” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Key warning chime sounds when “KEY” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• OFF position warning chime sounds when “KNOB” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

INDICATORThis test is able to check warning lamp operation.• “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when “KEY ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when “KEY IND” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

INT LAMPThis test is able to check interior room lamp operation.The interior room lamp is activated after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

LCD

This test is able to check meter display information• Engine start information displays when “BP N” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Engine start information displays when “BP I” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Key ID warning displays when “ID NG” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Steering lock information displays when “ROTAT” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• P position warning displays when “SFT P” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Intelligent Key insert information displays when “INSRT” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• Intelligent Key low battery warning displays when “BATT” on CONSULT-III screen is

touched.• Take away through window warning displays when “NO KY” on CONSULT-III screen is

touched.• Take away warning display when “OUTKEY” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.• OFF position warning display when “LK WN” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

TRUNK/GLASS HATCHThis test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation.This actuator opens when “OPEN” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

FLASHERThis test is able to check security hazard lamp operation.The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

HORNThis test is able to check horn operation.The horn is activated after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

P RANGEThis test is able to check A/T shift selector power supplyA/T shift selector power is supplied when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

ENGINE SW ILLUMIThis test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation.Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

LOCK INDICATORThis test is able to check LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch operation.LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

ACC INDICATORThis test is able to check ACC indicator in push-ignition switch operation.ACC indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

IGNITION ON INDThis test is able to check on indicator in push-ignition switch operation.ON indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

KEY SLOT ILLUMIThis test is able to check key slot illumination operation.Key slot illumination blinks when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.

TRUNK/BACK DOORThis test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator open operation.This actuator opens when “OPEN” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT




CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modernvehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links withother control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connectedwith 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with lesswiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result”.Is DTC “U1000” displayed?YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".



U1000 CAN COMMWhen BCM cannot communicate CAN com-munication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more.

CAN communication system


CS

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.REPLACE BCM

When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM.

>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004248028

1.REQUIRED WORK WHEN REPLACING BCM

Initialize control unit. Refer to CONSULT-III operation manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.

>> Work end.

DTCCONSULT-III display de-

scriptionDTC Detection Condition Possible cause

U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction. BCM


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B2553 IGNITION RELAY


B2553 IGNITION RELAY


BCM turns ON the following relays to ignition power supply to each ECU when the ignition switch is turnedON.• Ignition relay (inside fuse box)• Ignition relay (inside IPDM E/R)• Blower relayBCM checks any ignition relay ON request for consistency with the actual ignition relay operation status.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn ignition switch ON under the following conditions (start the engine), and wait for at least 2 seconds.

A/T models- A/T selector lever is in the P or N position- Do not depress brake pedal

M/T models- Do not depress clutch pedal2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III. Is DTC detected?YES >> Go to PCS-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".NO >> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK DTC WITH IPDM E/R

Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III. Refer to PCS-30, "DTC Index".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY FEEDBACK INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.




B2553 IGNITION RELAY

BCM detects a difference of signal for 2 seconds or more between the following information. • Ignition relay (fuse block) ON/OFF operation• Ignition relay (fuse block) feedback.

• Harness or connectors(ignition relay feedback circuit is open or short)

• IPDM E/R

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal

M123 123 Ground Ignition switchOFF 0

ON Battery voltage


CS

B2553 IGNITION RELAY[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY FEEDBACK CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.

3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.



>> INSPECTION END

BCM IPDM E/RContinuity


M123 123 E5 19 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M123 123 Not existed


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B260A IGNITION RELAY


B260A IGNITION RELAY


BCM turns ON the following relays to ignition power supply to each ECU when the ignition switch is turnedON.• Ignition relay (inserted into fuse block)• Ignition relay (built into IPDM E/R)• Blower fan motor relayBCM checks any ignition relay ON request for consistency with the actual ignition relay operation status.


DTC DETECTION LOGICNOTE:• If DTC B260A is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to

PCS-46, "DTC Logic".• If DTC B260A is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to

PCS-47, "DTC Logic".• If DTC B260A is displayed with DTC B261A, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC B261A. Refer to

PCS-59, "DTC Logic".



1. Turn ignition switch ON under the following conditions, and wait for at least 2 seconds.




1.CHECK DTC WITH IPDM E/R

Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT-III. Refer to PCS-30, "DTC Index".Is DTC detected?YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.



B260A IGNITION RELAY

BCM detects a difference of signal for 2 second or more between the following information.• Ignition relay (IPDM E/R) operation request• Ignition relay feedback from IPDM E/R (CAN).

• Harness or connectors(Ignition relay operation circuit is open or shorted.)

• BCM• IPDM E/R


CS

B260A IGNITION RELAY[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and BCM harness connector.

3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.



>> INSPECTION END

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal


IPDM E/R BCMContinuity


E5 27 M121 47 Existed

IPDM E/R

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E5 27 Not existed


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT


B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT


BCM controls the various electrical components and simultaneously supplies power according to the powersupply position.BCM checks the power supply position internally.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn the power supply position to ACC under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.




1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect accessory relay.3. Check voltage between accessory relay harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between accessory relay harness connector and BCM harness connector.



B2614 ACC relay circuitAn immediate operation of ACC relay is requested by BCM, but there is no response for more than 1 second.

• Harness or connectors(ACC relay circuit is open or short-ed)

• BCM• ACC relay

(+)


Accessory relay

Terminal

1 Ground Ignition switchOFF 0

ACC Battery voltage


CS

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


4. Check continuity between accessory relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between accessory relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair accessory relay ground circuit.

4.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY

Refer to PCS-53, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace accessory relay.



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Remove accessory relay.3. Check the continuity between accessory relay terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace accessory relay.

Accessory relay BCMContinuity

Terminal Connector Terminal

1 M122 95 Existed

Accessory relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

1 Not existed

Accessory relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

2 Existed

Terminals Condition Continuity

3 and 512 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed


PBIB0098E


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT


B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT




DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Turn ignition switch ON under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.




1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect blower relay.3. Check voltage between blower relay harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK BLOWER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between blower relay harness connector and BCM harness connector.



B2615 Blower relay circuit

BCM detects a difference of signal for 1 second or more between the following information.• Blower relay ON/OFF request • Blower relay feedback

• Harness or connectors (Blower relay circuit is open or shorted)

• BCM• Blower relay

(+)


Blower relay

Terminal

1 Ground Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0

ON Battery voltage


CS

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


4. Check continuity between blower relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.CHECK BLOWER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between blower relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair blower relay ground circuit.

4.CHECK BLOWER RELAY

Refer to PCS-55, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace blower relay.



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Remove blower relay.3. Check the continuity between blower relay terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace blower relay

Blower relay BCMContinuity


1 M122 102 Existed

Blower relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

1 Not existed

Blower relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

2 Existed




PBIB0098E


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT


B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT




DTC DETECTION LOGIC







1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect ignition relay.3. Check voltage between ignition relay harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between ignition relay harness connector and BCM harness connector.



B2616 Ignition relay circuitAn immediate operation of ignition relay (fuse block) is requested by BCM, but there is no re-sponse for more than 1 second

• Harness or connectors (Ignition relay circuit is open or shorted)

• BCM• Ignition relay (Fuse block)

(+)


Ignition relay

Terminal

1 Ground Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0

ON Battery voltage


CS

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


4. Check continuity between ignition relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer toBCS-81, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between ignition relay harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair ignition relay ground circuit.

4.CHECK IGNITION RELAY

Refer to PCS-57, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace ignition relay.



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Remove ignition relay.3. Check the continuity between ignition relay terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace Ignition relay

Ignition relay BCMContinuity


1 M122 82 Existed

Ignition relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

1 Not existed

Ignition relay

GroundContinuity

Terminal

2 Existed




PBIB0098E


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B2618 BCM


B2618 BCM




DTC DETECTION LOGICNOTE:• If DTC B2618 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to

PCS-46, "DTC Logic".• If DTC B2618 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to

PCS-47, "DTC Logic".







1.INSPECTION START

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode with CONSULT-III.3. Touch “ERASE”.4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.

See PCS-58, "DTC Logic".Is the 1st trip DTC B2618 displayed again?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation"NO >> INSPECTION END



B2618 BCMAn immediate operation of ignition relay (IPDM E/R) is requested by BCM, but there is no response for more than 1 second

BCM


CS

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


BCM transmits the change in the power supply position with the push-button ignition switch to IPDM E/R viathe CAN communication line. IPDM E/R transmits the power supply position status via CAN communicationline to BCM.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC



1. Press the push-button ignition switch under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.




1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION

Press push-button ignition switch and check if it turns to ON.Does ignition switch turn to ON?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)

1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Removal and Installation".

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and BCM connector.



B261APUSH-BUTTON IG-NITION SWITCH

BCM detects a difference of signal for 1 second or more between the following information. • Power supply position by push-button ignition

switch• Power supply position from IPDM E/R (CAN)

Harness or connectors(Push-button ignition switch circuit is open or shorted.)

(+)


IPDM E/R

Connector Terminal

E5 28 Ground Battery voltage


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connec-

tor.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

4.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (BCM)

1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".

5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM)

1. Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R connector.2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.





>> INSPECTION END

IPDM E/R Push-button ignition switchContinuity


E5 28 M50 4 Existed

IPDM E/R

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E5 28 Not existed

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal


BCM Push-button ignition switchContinuity


M122 89 M50 4 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M122 89 Not existed


CS

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITBCM

BCM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004674473






1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connectors.3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.


Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

Signal name Fuse and fusible link No.

Battery power supplyK

10

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal

M118 1Ground Battery voltage

M119 11

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 13 Existed


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


BCM transmits the change in the power supply position with the push-button ignition switch to IPDM E/R viathe CAN communication line. IPDM E/R transmits the power supply position status via CAN communicationline to BCM.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

1. Select “PUSH SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Check the push-button ignition switch signal under the following condition.

Is the indication normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Go to PCS-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION

Press push-button ignition switch and check if it turns to ON.Does ignition switch turn to ON?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)

1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Removal and Installation".

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and BCM connector.2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connec-

tor.



PUSH SWPush-button ignition switch is pressed ON

Push-button ignition switch is not pressed OFF

(+)


IPDM E/R

Connector Terminal

E5 28 Ground Battery voltage

IPDM E/R Push-button ignition switchContinuity


E5 28 M50 4 Existed

IPDM E/R

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E5 28 Not existed


CS

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 6.NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

4.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (BCM)

1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".

5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM)

1. Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R connector.2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.





>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.3. Check continuity between push-button ignition switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION END.NO >> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-112, "Removal and Installation".

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal


BCM Push-button ignition switchContinuity


M122 89 M50 4 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M122 89 Not existed

Push-button ignition switchCondition Continuity

Terminal

1 4Push-button ignition switch

Pressed Existed

Not pressed Not existed


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR


PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR


The switch that changes the power supply position.BCM maintains the power supply position status.BCM changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition switch.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check push-button ignition switch (“LOCK INDICATOR”, “ACC INDICATOR” and “IGNITION ON IND”) inActive Test Mode with CONSULT-III.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Refer to PCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.3. Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO-1 >> Check 10 A fuse [No.9, located in fuse block (J/B)].NO-2 >> Check harness for open or short between push-button ignition switch and fuse.

2.CHECK BCM INPUT

1. Connect push-button ignition switch connector.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

Is the inspection normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".NO >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.


LOCK INDICATORACC INDICATORIGNITION ON IND

ONPosition indicator

Illuminate

OFF Not illuminate

(+)


Push-button ignition switch

Connector Terminal


(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal

M119 15

Ground Battery voltageM122 93

M123 134


CS

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.


Is the inspection normal?YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-112, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.

IndicatorBCM Push-button ignition switch

ContinuityConnector Terminal Connector Terminal

LOCK M123 134

M50

5

ExistedACC M119 15 6

ON M122 93 7

IndicatorBCM

Ground


LOCK M123 134

Not existedACC M119 15

ON M122 93




POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram - PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) - INFOID:0000000004704252

JCMWM3062GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3063GB




JCMWM3064GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3065GB




JCMWM3066GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3067GB


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)


ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONBCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)





FR WIPER HIOther than front wiper switch HI Off

Front wiper switch HI On

FR WIPER LOWOther than front wiper switch LO Off

Front wiper switch LO On

FR WASHER SWFront washer switch OFF Off

Front washer switch ON On

FR WIPER INTOther than front wiper switch INT Off

Front wiper switch INT On

FR WIPER STOPFront wiper is not in STOP position Off

Front wiper is in STOP position On

INT VOLUME Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7Wiper intermittent dial

position

TURN SIGNAL ROther than turn signal switch RH Off

Turn signal switch RH On

TURN SIGNAL LOther than turn signal switch LH Off

Turn signal switch LH On

TAIL LAMP SWOther than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Off

Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND On

HI BEAM SWOther than lighting switch HI Off


HEAD LAMP SW 1Other than lighting switch 2ND Off

Lighting switch 2ND On



PASSING SWOther than lighting switch PASS Off

Lighting switch PASS On

AUTO LIGHT SWOther than lighting switch AUTO Off

Lighting switch AUTO On

FR FOG SWFront fog lamp switch OFF Off

Front fog lamp switch ON On

RR FOG SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-DRDriver door closed Off

Driver door opened On

DOOR SW-ASPassenger door closed Off

Passenger door opened On

DOOR SW-RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off


CS

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


DOOR SW-RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-BKNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CDL LOCK SWOther than power door lock switch LOCK Off

Power door lock switch LOCK On

CDL UNLOCK SWOther than power door lock switch UNLOCK Off

Power door lock switch UNLOCK On

KEY CYL LK-SWOther than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder LOCK position On

KEY CYL UN-SWOther than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position On

KEY CYL SW-TRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

HAZARD SWHazard switch is OFF Off

Hazard switch is ON On

REAR DEF SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

H/L WASH SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

TR CANCEL SWTrunk lid opener cancel switch OFF Off

Trunk lid opener cancel switch ON On

TR/BD OPEN SWTrunk lid opener switch OFF Off

While the trunk lid opener switch is turned ON On

TRNK/HAT MNTRTrunk lid closed Off

Trunk lid opened On

RKE-LOCKLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-UNLOCKUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-TR/BDTRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-PANICPANIC button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-P/W OPENUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held On

RKE-MODE CHG

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed and held simulta-neously

Off

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held simultaneously On

OPTICAL SENSORBright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V

Dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V

REQ SW -DRDriver door request switch is not pressed Off

Driver door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -ASPassenger door request switch is not pressed Off

Passenger door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off





REQ SW -RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

REQ SW -BD/TRTrunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Off

Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed On

PUSH SWPush-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed On

IGN RLY2 -F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off

Ignition switch in ON position On

ACC RLY -F/BNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CLUCH SWThe clutch pedal is not depressed Off

The clutch pedal is depressed On

BRAKE SW 1

The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown Off

The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is nor-mal

On

BRAKE SW 2The brake pedal is not depressed Off

The brake pedal is depressed On

DETE/CANCL SW

• Selector lever in P position (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in any position other than P (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

On

SFT PN/N SWSelector lever in any position other than P and N Off

Selector lever in P or N position On

S/L -LOCKSteering is unlocked Off

Steering is locked On

S/L -UNLOCKSteering is locked Off

Steering is unlocked On

S/L RELAY-F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off


UNLK SEN -DRDriver door is unlocked Off

Driver door is locked On

PUSH SW -IPDMPush-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed On



DETE SW -IPDMSelector lever in any position other than P Off

Selector lever in P position On

SFT PN -IPDM

• Selector lever in any position other than P and N (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in P or N position• The clutch pedal is depressed

On

SFT P -METSelector lever in any position other than P Off


SFT N -METSelector lever in any position other than N Off

Selector lever in N position On



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


ENGINE STATE

Engine stopped Stop

While the engine stalls Stall

At engine cranking Crank

Engine running Run

S/L LOCK-IPDMSteering is unlocked Off


S/L UNLK-IPDMSteering is locked Off


S/L RELAY-REQ

Steering lock system is not the LOCK condition and the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

Off

Steering lock system are not the LOCK condition or the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

On

VEH SPEED 1 While drivingEquivalent to speed-

ometer reading


ometer reading

DOOR STAT-DR

Driver door is locked LOCK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) READY

Driver door is unlocked UNLOCK

DOOR STAT-AS

Passenger door is locked LOCK


Passenger door is unlocked UNLOCK

ID OK FLAGSteering is locked Reset

Steering is unlocked Set

PRMT ENG STRTThe engine start is prohibited Reset

The engine start is permitted Set

PRMT RKE STRTNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Reset

KEY SW -SLOTThe Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot Off

The Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot On

RKE OPE COUN1 During the operation of the Intelligent KeyOperation frequency of

the Intelligent Key

RKE OPE COUN2NOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

—

CONFRM ID ALL

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID4

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID3

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM.

Done





CONFIRM ID2

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID reg-istered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID1

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM.

Done

TP 4The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 3The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 2The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 1The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

AIR PRESS FL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front LH

tire

AIR PRESS FR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front RH

tire

AIR PRESS RR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear RH

tire

AIR PRESS RL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear LH

tire

ID REGST FL1ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST FR1ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RR1ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RL1ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

WARNING LAMPTire pressure indicator OFF Off

Tire pressure indicator ON On

BUZZERTire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Off

Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding On



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JPMIA0062ZZ





Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)Signal nameInput/ Output+ –

1(W)


2(Y)

GroundP/W power supply (BAT)

Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V

3(O)

GroundP/W power supply (RAP)

Output Ignition switch ON 12 V

4(LG)

GroundInterior room lamp power supply

Output

Interior room lamp battery saver is activated.(Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)

0 V

Interior room lamp battery saver is not acti-vated.(Outputs the interior room lamp power sup-ply)

12 V

5(P)

GroundPassenger door UN-LOCK

OutputPassenger door

UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-vated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK (Ac-tuator is not activated)

0 V

7(SB)

Ground Step lamp Output Step lampON 0 V

OFF 12 V

8(V)

GroundAll doors, fuel lid LOCK

OutputAll doors, fuel lid

LOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than LOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

9(G)

GroundDriver door, fuel lid UNLOCK

OutputDriver door, fuel lid

UNLOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

11(R)


13(B)


14(W)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination ground

Output Tail lamp

OFF 0 V

ON

NOTE:When the illumination brighten-

ing/dimming level is in the neutral position.

15(O)

Ground ACC indicator lamp Output Ignition switch

OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated)

Battery voltage

ACC 0 V

JSNIA0010GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


17(W)

GroundTurn signal RH (Front)


Turn signal switch OFF 0 V

Turn signal switch RH

6.5 V

18(O)

Ground Turn signal LH (Front) OutputIgnition switch ON


Turn signal switch LH

6.5 V

19(V)

GroundRoom lamp timer control

OutputInterior room lamp

OFF 12 V

ON 0 V

20(V)

Ground Turn signal RH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

23(L)

Ground Trunk lid open Output Trunk lid

OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is not activated)

0 V

25(Y)

Ground Turn signal LH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

30(P)

Ground Trunk room lamp OutputTrunk room lamp

ON 0 V

OFF 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E




34(SB)

GroundTrunk room antenna (−)

OutputIgnition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the passenger compart-ment

When Intelligent Key is not in the passenger compart-ment

35(V)

GroundTrunk room antenna (+)




38(B)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (−)

Output

When the trunk lid opener re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


39(W)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (+)

Output




47(Y)

GroundIgnition relay (IPDM E/R) control

Output Ignition switchOFF or ACC 12 V

ON 0 V

50(R)

GroundTrunk room lamp switch

InputTrunk room lamp switch

OFF (Trunk lid is closed)

11.8 V

ON (Trunk lid is opened) 0 V

52(SB)

Ground Starter relay control Output

Ignition switch ON (A/T mod-els)

When selector lever is in P or N position

12 V

When selector lever is not in P or N position

0 V

Ignition switch ON (M/T mod-els)

When the clutch pedal is depressed

Battery voltage

When the clutch pedal is not depressed

0 V

61(SB)

GroundTrunk lid opener re-quest switch

InputTrunk lid open-er request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

64(L)

GroundIntelligent Key warn-ing buzzer (Engine room)

OutputIntelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room)

Sounding 0 V

Not sounding 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0016GB




67(GR)

GroundTrunk lid opener switch

InputTrunk lid open-er switch

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed

11.8 V

72(R)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (−) (Center console)




73(G)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (+) (Center console)





Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


74(SB)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (−)

Output

When the pas-senger door re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



75(BR)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (+)

Output




76(V)

GroundDriver door antenna (−)

Output

When the driv-er door request switch is oper-ated with igni-tion switch OFF




Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB




77(LG)

GroundDriver door antenna (+)

Output




78(Y)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (−) (Instrument panel)




79(BR)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (+) (Instrument panel)





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


80(GR)

GroundNATS antenna amp (Built in key slot)

Input/Output

During waitingIgnition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelli-gent Key into the key slot.

Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should

move.

81(W)


Input/Output



move.

82(R)

GroundIgnition relay [Fuse block (J/B)] control


ON 12 V

83(Y)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver communica-tion

Input/Output

During waiting

When operating either button on the Intelli-gent Key

87(Y)

GroundCombination switch INPUT 5

InputCombination switch

All switches OFF(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.4 V

Front fog lamp switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0064GB

JMKIA0065GB

JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB




88(O)




1.4 V

Lighting switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3

1.3 V

89(BR)

GroundPush-button ignition switch (Push switch)

InputPush-button ig-nition switch (push switch)

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed Battery voltage

90(P)

Ground CAN-LInput/ Output

— —

91(L)

Ground CAN-HInput/ Output

— —

92(LG)

Ground Key slot illumination OutputKey slot illumi-nation

OFF 0 V

Blinking

6.5 V

ON 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0015GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


93(Y)

Ground ON indicator lamp Output Ignition switch


Battery voltage

ON 0 V

95(O)

Ground ACC relay control Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 12 V

96(GR)

GroundA/T shift selector (De-tention switch) power supply

Output — 12 V

97(L)

GroundSteering lock condi-tion No. 1

Input Steering lockLOCK status 0 V

UNLOCK status 12 V

98(P)



UNLOCK status 0 V

99(R)

Ground

Selector lever P posi-tion switch

Input

Selector leverP position 0 V

Any position other than P 12 V

ASCD clutch switch (M/T models without ICC)

ASCD clutch switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

12 V

ICC clutch switch (M/T models with ICC)

ICC clutch switch


0 V


12 V

100(Y)

GroundPassenger door re-quest switch

InputPassenger door request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

101(P)

GroundDriver door request switch

InputDriver door re-quest switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

102(O)

GroundBlower fan motor re-lay control


ON 12 V

103(LG)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver power sup-ply


106(W)



ON 0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0016GB

JPMIA0016GB




107(LG)


Input

Combination switch(Wiper intermit-tent dial 4)

All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

Front wiper switch LO

1.3 V

Front washer switch ON

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0039GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


108(R)




1.4 V

Lighting switch AUTO(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 1ST(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0039GB




109(W)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V

Lighting switch PASS

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND

1.3 V

Front wiper switch INT

1.3 V

Front wiper switch HI

1.3 V

110(G)

Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch

ON 0 V

OFF

1.1 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0012GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


111(Y)

GroundSteering lock unit communication

Input/Output

Steering lock

LOCK status 12 V

LOCK or UNLOCK

For 15 seconds after UN-LOCK

12 V

15 seconds or later after UNLOCK

0 V

113(O)

Ground Optical sensor InputIgnition switch ON

When bright outside of the vehicle

Close to 5 V

When dark outside of the vehicle

Close to 0 V

114(R)

GroundClutch interlock switch

InputClutch interlock switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

116(SB)

Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Input — Battery voltage

118(BR)

Ground

Stop lamp switch 2 (Without ICC)

Input

Stop lamp switch

OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

Stop lamp switch 2 (With ICC)

Stop lamp switch OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) and ICC brake hold relay OFF

0 V

Stop lamp switch ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed) or ICC brake hold relay ON

Battery voltage

119(SB)

GroundDriver side door lock assembly (Unlock sensor)

Input Driver door

LOCK status(Unlock sensor switch OFF)

1.1 V

UNLOCK status(Unlock switch sensor ON)

0 V

121(SB)

Ground Key slot switch Input

When the Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot

12 V

When the Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot

0 V

123(W)

Ground IGN feedback Input Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0 V

ON Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0066GB

JPMIA0012GB




124(LG)

GroundPassenger door switch

InputPassenger door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

129(O)

GroundTrunk lid opener can-cel switch

InputTrunk lid open-er cancel switch

CANCEL

1.1 V

ON 0 V

132(V)

GroundPower window switch communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

10.2 V

Ignition switch OFF or ACC 12 V

133(L)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination

OutputPush-button ig-nition switch il-lumination

ON (Tail lamps OFF) 9.5 V

ON (Tail lamps ON)

NOTE:The pulse width of this wave is

varied by the illumination bright-ening/dimming level.

OFF 0 V

134(LG)

Ground LOCK indicator lamp OutputLOCK indicator lamp

OFF Battery voltage

ON 0 V

137(O)

GroundReceiver and sensor ground

Input Ignition switch ON 0 V

138(V)

GroundReceiver and sensor power supply

Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 5.0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0012GB

JPMIA0013GB

JPMIA0159GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


139(L)

GroundTire pressure receiv-er communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

Standby state

When receiving the signal from the transmitter

140(GR)

GroundSelector lever P/N position (A/T models)

Input Selector leverP or N position 12 V

Except P and N positions 0 V

141(R)

Ground Security indicator OutputSecurity indica-tor

ON 0 V

Blinking

11.3 V

OFF 12 V

142(BR)

GroundCombination switch OUTPUT 5

Output


All switches OFF 0 V

Lighting switch 1ST

10.7 V

Lighting switch HI

Lighting switch 2ND


143(V)


OutputCombination switch


0 V

Front wiper switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7


Description

ConditionValue


OCC3881D

OCC3880D

JPMIA0014GB

JPMIA0031GB

JPMIA0032GB




144(G)




0 V

Front washer switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V


145(L)


Output




10.7 V


Lighting switch AUTO

146(SB)


Output



Front fog lamp switch ON

10.7 V

Lighting switch 2ND



149(W)

GroundTire pressure warning check switch

Input — 12 V

150(R)

Ground Driver door switch InputDriver door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

151(G)

GroundRear window defog-ger relay control

OutputRear window defogger

Active 0 V

Not activated Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0033GB

JPMIA0034GB

JPMIA0035GB

JPMIA0011GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Wiring Diagram - BCM - INFOID:0000000004679457

JCMWM3046GB




JCMWM3047GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3048GB




JCMWM3049GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3050GB





FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTCBCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.

JCMWM3051GB


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2195: ANTI SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED Inhibit steering lockWhen normal vehicle speed signals are received from ABS actua-tor and electric unit (control unit) for 500 ms

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Starter control relay signal• Starter relay status signal

B2601: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consis-tent• Selector lever P position switch signal• P range signal (CAN)


5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are ful-filled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more

B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)

B2604: PNP SW Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P and N position (battery volt-

age)- P range signal or N range signal (CAN): ON• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- P range signal and N range signal (CAN): OFF


500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- Interlock/PNP switch signal (CAN): OFF• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P or N position (battery volt-

age)- PNP switch signal (CAN): ON

B2606: S/L RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)




HIGH FLASHER OPERATIONBCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status by the current value.BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signallamp operating.NOTE:The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004679459

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prioritychart.


500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status has becomes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)

B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent• Starter motor relay control signal• Starter relay status signal (CAN)

B2609: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When the following steering lock conditions agree• BCM steering lock control status• Steering lock condition No. 1 signal status• Steering lock condition No. 2 signal status

B260A: IGNITION RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following conditions are fulfilled• IGN relay (IPDM E/R) control signal: OFF (Battery voltage)• Ignition ON signal (CAN to IPDM E/R): OFF (Request signal)• Ignition ON signal (CAN from IPDM E/R): OFF (Condition signal)

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOSTMaintains the power supply position attained at the time of DTC detection

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Power position changes to ACC• Receives engine status signal (CAN)


When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Steering lock unit status signal (CAN) is received normally• The BCM steering lock control status matches the steering lock

status recognized by the steering lock unit status signal (CAN from IPDM E/R)

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the starter motor relay control inside BCM becomes normal

B2618: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control inside BCM be-comes normal

B2619: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the steering lock unit power supply output control in-side BCM becomes normal

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE Inhibit engine cranking BCM initialization

B26E8: CLUTCH SW Inhibit engine cranking

When any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): ON- Clutch interlock switch signal: OFF (0 V)• Status 2- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): OFF- Clutch interlock switch signal: ON (Battery voltage)

B26E9: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When BCM transmits the LOCK request signal to steering lock unit, and receives LOCK response signal from steering lock unit, the fol-lowing conditions are fulfilled• Steering condition No. 1 signal: LOCK (0 V)• Steering condition No. 2 signal: LOCK (Battery voltage)



CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Priority DTC

1 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE

2• U1000: CAN COMM• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

3

• B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP• B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY• B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM• B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM• B2195: ANTI SCANNING

4

• B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L• B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM• B2553: IGNITION RELAY• B2555: STOP LAMP • B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B2557: VEHICLE SPEED• B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY• B2601: SHIFT POSITION• B2602: SHIFT POSITION• B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS• B2604: PNP SW• B2605: PNP SW• B2606: S/L RELAY• B2607: S/L RELAY• B2608: STARTER RELAY• B2609: S/L STATUS• B260A: IGNITION RELAY• B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST• B2612: S/L STATUS• B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC• B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC• B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC• B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC• B2618: BCM• B2619: BCM• B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B261E: VEHICLE TYPE• B26E8: CLUTCH SW• B26E9: S/L STATUS• B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION• C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR• U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG





NOTE:The details of time display are as follows.• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-14, "COM-MON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".

5

• C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL• C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR• C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR• C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL• C1708: [NO DATA] FL• C1709: [NO DATA] FR• C1710: [NO DATA] RR• C1711: [NO DATA] RL• C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL• C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR• C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR• C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL• C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL• C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR• C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR• C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL• C1720: [CODE ERR] FL• C1721: [CODE ERR] FR• C1722: [CODE ERR] RR• C1723: [CODE ERR] RL• C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL• C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR• C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR• C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL• C1734: CONTROL UNIT

6• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA

Priority DTC

CONSULT display Fail-safe

Freeze Frame Data•Vehicle Speed•Odo/Trip Meter

•Vehicle condition

Intelligent Key warning lamp ON

Tire pressure monitor warning

lamp ON

Refer-ence page


— — — — —

U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-35

U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) — — — — BCS-36

U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG — — — — BCS-37

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L × × — — SEC-55

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM × × — — SEC-56

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — — SEC-47

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY × — — — SEC-50

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-51

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-53

B2195: ANTI SCANNING × — — — SEC-54

B2553: IGNITION RELAY — × — — PCS-48

B2555: STOP LAMP — × — — SEC-59


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — SEC-61

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED × × × — SEC-63

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY × × × — SEC-64

B2562: LOW VOLTAGE — × — — BCS-38

B2601: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-65


B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS × × × — SEC-70

B2604: PNP SW × × × — SEC-73

B2605: PNP SW × × × — SEC-75

B2606: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-77

B2607: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-78

B2608: STARTER RELAY × × × — SEC-80

B2609: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-82

B260A: IGNITION RELAY × × × — PCS-50

B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-86

B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-87

B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-88

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST × × × — SEC-89

B2612: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-94

B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-52

B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-54

B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-56

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC × × × — SEC-98

B2618: BCM × × × — PCS-58

B2619: BCM × × × — SEC-100

B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — PCS-59

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-101

B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-55



B26E8: CLUTCH SW × × × — SEC-90

B26E9: S/L STATUS × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-92

B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION — × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-93

C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL — — — ×

WT-17C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR — — — ×

C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR — — — ×

C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL — — — ×






lamp ON

Refer-ence page




C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — ×

WT-19C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — ×

C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — ×

C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — ×

C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-21C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR — — — ×

C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR — — — ×

C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL — — — ×

C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-24C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR — — — ×

C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR — — — ×

C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL — — — ×

C1720: [CODE ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-26C1721: [CODE ERR] FR — — — ×

C1722: [CODE ERR] RR — — — ×

C1723: [CODE ERR] RL — — — ×

C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL — — — ×

WT-29C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR — — — ×

C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR — — — ×

C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL — — — ×

C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR — — — × WT-32

C1734: CONTROL UNIT — — — × WT-33






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


CS

PRECAUTIONS[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< PRECAUTION >










Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery DisconnectINFOID:0000000004248076

NOTE:• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion, then disconnect both battery cables.• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both

battery cables.• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.

If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock andcannot be turned.If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-cedure below before starting the repair operation.

OPERATION PROCEDURE1. Connect both battery cables.

NOTE:Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)

3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-nected and the steering wheel can be turned.

4. Perform the necessary repair operation.


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]PRECAUTIONS

< PRECAUTION >5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn

the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steeringwheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)

6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.


CS

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISPUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE


Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and checkeach symptom.NOTE:The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system, and NATS-IVIS/NVIS in the IntelligentKey system are closely related to each other regarding control. The vehicle security function can operate onlywhen the door lock and power distribution system are operating normally.

Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III.• Intelligent Key is not inserted in key slot.• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.


1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (DOOR LOCK FUNCTION)

Lock/unlock door with door request switch.Refer to DLK-11, "System Description".Is the operation normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Check Intelligent Key system (door lock function). Refer to DLK-84, "Diagnosis Procedure".

2.PERFORM WORK SUPPORT

Perform “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” on Work Support of “INTELLIGENT KEY”.Refer to DLK-49, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".

>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of “BCM”.Is DTC detected?YES >> Refer to DLK-55, "DTC Logic" (instrument center), DLK-57, "DTC Logic" (console) or DLK-59,

"DTC Logic" (trunk room).NO >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Check push-button ignition switch.Refer to PCS-112, "Removal and Installation".Is the operation normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the inspection normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMI-NATE


PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT IL-LUMINATE


• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to PCS-34, "Work Flow".• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and

check each symptom.

Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III.• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.


1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INDICATOR

Check push-button ignition switch indicator.Refer to PCS-64, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".NO >> GO TO 1.


CS


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONBCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)



REMOVAL1. Remove dash side finisher (passenger side). Refer to INT-14, "Exploded View".2. Remove bolt and nut.3. Remove BCM and disconnect the connector.


1. BCM

JPMIA0063ZZ


[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH




REMOVAL1. Remove the cluster lid A assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove the push-button ignition switch (1) from cluster lid A

assembly, and then remove pawl (A). Press push-button ignitionswitch (1) back to disengage from cluster lid A assembly.


JMKIA0167ZZ



C

D

E

BSECTION PG

A

POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS

G

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

O

P

N

CONTENTS

P

POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT


BATTERY ............................................................ 3How to Handle Battery ..............................................3Work Flow .................................................................5

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .......................... 6

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ............... 6Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY - ......6Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSIBLE LINK No. K - ............................................15Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 6 - ...........................................................18Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 7 - ...........................................................21Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 9 - ...........................................................23Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 10 - .........................................................25Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 11 - .........................................................29Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 34 - .........................................................31Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 50 - .........................................................34Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 53 - .........................................................38Wiring Diagram - ACCESSORY POWER SUP-PLY - .......................................................................45Wiring Diagram - ACCESSORY POWER SUP-PLY FUSE No. 19 - .................................................48Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - ....51Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 3 - ...........................................................62Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 4 - ...........................................................68Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 44 - .........................................................70

Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 45 - .........................................................73Fuse .........................................................................76Fusible Link .............................................................76Circuit Breaker .........................................................76

HARNESS LAYOUT .........................................77How To Read Harness Layout ................................77Outline .....................................................................78Main Harness ..........................................................79Engine Room Harness ............................................80Engine Control Harness ..........................................82Body Harness ..........................................................84Body No. 2 Harness ................................................85Room Lamp Harness ...............................................86Door Harness (Driver Side Door) ............................87Door Harness (Passenger Side Door) .....................88

HARNESS CONNECTOR .................................89Description ...............................................................89

STANDARDIZED RELAY .................................92Description ...............................................................92

FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) ............94Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement ..........94

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX ........95Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement ........................95


Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement ..........96

PRECAUTION ..............................................97

PRECAUTIONS .................................................97Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" .................................................................97Precaution for Battery Service .................................97Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ....97

PG-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

PREPARATION ........................................... 98

PREPARATION ................................................. 98Special Service Tools ............................................. 98

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 99

BATTERY .......................................................... 99Exploded View ........................................................ 99Removal and Installation ........................................ 99

BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK ..101Exploded View ...................................................... 101Removal and Installation ....................................... 101

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........................................................102

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................102

Battery ................................................................... 102


G

BATTERY[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


BASIC INSPECTIONBATTERY

How to Handle Battery INFOID:0000000004248116

CAUTION:• If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt

booster battery.• After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good

contact.• Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.

METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE

The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery.• The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept

clean and dry.• The terminal connections should be clean and tight.• At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.

This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and“maintenance-free”.

• When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period oftime, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. (Ifthe vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)

• Check the charge condition of the battery.Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep aclose check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.

CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVELWARNING:Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touch-ing a battery, never touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid con-tacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

MEL040F

ELA0349D

MEL042F


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]BATTERY

< BASIC INSPECTION >• Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.• Add distilled water up to the MAX level.

SulphationA battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattendedfor a long time and the specific gravity will become less than1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltageand current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less cur-rent and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage ofcharging sulphated batteries.A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into ser-vice by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, fol-lowed by a battery capacity test.

SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading accord-

ing to electrolyte temperature.

Hydrometer Temperature Correction

MEL043F

PKIA2353E

MEL042FA

Battery electrolyte temperature [°C (°F)] Add to specific gravity reading

71 (160) 0.032

66 (150) 0.028

60 (140) 0.024

54 (130) 0.020

49 (120) 0.016

43 (110) 0.012

38 (100) 0.008

32 (90) 0.004

27 (80) 0

21 (70) −0.004

16 (60) −0.008

10 (50) −0.012

4 (40) −0.016

−1 (30) −0.020

−7 (20) −0.024


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


CHARGING THE BATTERYCAUTION:• Never “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.• Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.• When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Never turn on the

charger first, as this may cause a spark.• If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55 °C (131 °F), stop charging. Always charge battery at

a temperature below 55 °C (131 °F).

Charging Rates

Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.NOTE:The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indi-cates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging ampsindicated above refer to initial charge rate.• If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced.


TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH BATTERY SERVICE CENTERFor battery testing, use Battery Service Center (J-48087). For details and operating instructions, refer to Tech-nical Service Bulletin and/or Battery Service Center User Guide.

−12 (10) −0.028

−18 (0) −0.032

Battery electrolyte temperature [°C (°F)] Add to specific gravity reading

Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition

1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged

1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged

1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged

1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged

1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged

1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged

Amps Time

50 1 hour

25 2 hours

10 5 hours

5 10 hours


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT


DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISPOWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY - INFOID:0000000004248118

JCMWM3072GB


G

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3073GB




JCMWM3074GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3075GB




JCMWM3076GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3077GB




JCMWM3078GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3079GB




JCMWM3080GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSIBLE LINK No. K - INFOID:0000000004248119

JCMWM3081GB




JCMWM3082GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3083GB




Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 6 - INFOID:0000000004248120

JCMWM3084GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3085GB




JCMWM3086GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3087GB




JCMWM3088GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3089GB




JCMWM3090GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3091GB




JCMWM3092GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3093GB




JCMWM3094GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3095GB




JCMWM3096GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3097GB




JCMWM3098GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3099GB





JCMWM3100GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3101GB




JCMWM3102GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3103GB





JCMWM3104GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3105GB




JCMWM3106GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3107GB




JCMWM3108GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3109GB




JCMWM3110GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Wiring Diagram - ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY - INFOID:0000000004248127

JCMWM3111GB




JCMWM3112GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3113GB




Wiring Diagram - ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 19 - INFOID:0000000004248128

JCMWM3114GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3115GB




JCMWM3116GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - INFOID:0000000004248129

JCMWM3117GB




JCMWM3118GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3119GB




JCMWM3120GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3121GB




JCMWM3122GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3123GB




JCMWM3124GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3125GB




JCMWM3126GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3127GB




Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY FUSE No. 3 - INFOID:0000000004248130

JCMWM3128GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3129GB




JCMWM3130GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3131GB




JCMWM3132GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3133GB





JCMWM3134GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3135GB





JCMWM3136GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3137GB




JCMWM3138GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P



JCMWM3139GB




JCMWM3140GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3141GB




Fuse INFOID:0000000004248134

• If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction beforeinstalling new fuse.

• Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specifiedrating.

• Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder prop-erly.

• Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is notused for a long period of time.

Fusible Link INFOID:0000000004248135

A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or byfeeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuittester or test lamp.

CAUTION:• If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit

(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. Insuch a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunc-tion.

• Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl orrubber parts.

Circuit Breaker INFOID:0000000004248136

The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. Thetemperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies withcurrent flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temper-ature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, theelectrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit current.Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance fallsaccordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume.

CEL083

1 : Fusible link

JPMIA0515ZZ

SEL109W


G

HARNESS LAYOUT[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


HARNESS LAYOUT

How To Read Harness Layout INFOID:0000000004248137

CONNECTOR SYMBOLMain symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.

1 : Connector model

2 : Cavity

3 : Male (M) and female (F) terminals

4 : Connector color

5 : Special type

JPMIA0113GB

JPMIA0114GB


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]HARNESS LAYOUT


Outline INFOID:0000000004248138

JCMIM0568GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Main Harness INFOID:0000000004248139

JCMIM0569GB




Engine Room Harness INFOID:0000000004248140

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

JCMIM0570GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

JCMIM0571GB




Engine Control Harness INFOID:0000000004248141

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

JCMIM0572GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

JCMIM0573GB




Body Harness INFOID:0000000004248142

JCMIM0574GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Body No. 2 Harness INFOID:0000000004248143

JCMIM0575GB




Room Lamp Harness INFOID:0000000004248144

JCMIM0576GB


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


Door Harness (Driver Side Door) INFOID:0000000004248145

JCMIA0191GB




Door Harness (Passenger Side Door) INFOID:0000000004248146

JCMIA0192GB


G

HARNESS CONNECTOR[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


HARNESS CONNECTOR


HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)• The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.• The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the figure

below.CAUTION:Never pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.

[Example]

HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)• A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those

related to OBD.• The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-

tion.• The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure

below.

SEL769DA


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]HARNESS CONNECTOR

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >CAUTION:• Never pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.• Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.

[Example]

HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE)• Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM,

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.• Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors.• Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connec-

tion.CAUTION:

SEL769V


G

HARNESS CONNECTOR[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect theseconnectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.

LKIA0670E

1. Control unit with single leverA. FastenB. LoosenC. Lever

2. Control unit with dual leversA. LeversB. FastenC. Loosen

3. SMJ connectorA. LeverB. FastenC. Loosen


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]STANDARDIZED RELAY


STANDARDIZED RELAY


NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYSRelays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.

TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS

SEL881H

1M ···················· 1 Make 2M ···················· 2 Make

1T ···················· 1 Transfer 1M·1B ···················· 1 Make 1 Break

SEL882H


G

STANDARDIZED RELAY[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


SEL188W


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)


FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)

Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000004248149

JCMWM3142GB


G

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX

Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement INFOID:0000000004248150

JCMWM3143GB


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)


IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINEROOM)

Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000004248151

JCMWM3144GB


G

PRECAUTIONS[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P

< PRECAUTION >












Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004685061

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, coverthe lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.

PIIB3706J


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]PREPARATION

< PREPARATION >


Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004248155

Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

—(J-48087)Battery Service Center Tests battery.

For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin and Battery Service Center User Guide.

WKIA5280E


G


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONBATTERY



REMOVAL1. Remove battery cover.2. Remove the clips (A), and remove hoodledge cover (RH) (1).

3. Remove cowl top cover (RH). Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View".4. Remove cover of battery positive terminal.5. Loosen battery terminal nuts (1), and disconnect both battery

cables from battery terminals. CAUTION:When disconnecting, disconnect the battery cable from thenegative terminal first.

6. Remove battery fix frame mounting nuts (2) and battery fixframe (3).

7. Remove battery.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:When connecting, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first.

1 : Battery fix frame

2 : Battery fix frame mounting nuts

3 : Battery terminal (-)

4 : Battery terminal (+)

JPMIA0487ZZ

JPMIA0488ZZ

JPMIA0489ZZ

Battery fix frame mounting nut

: 3.9 N·m (0.40 kg-m, 35 in-lb)

Battery terminal nut

: 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]BATTERY

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to GI-56, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection".


G

BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK



REMOVAL1. Remove battery cover.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Remove cover of battery positive terminal.4. Remove harness mounting nuts (1) to disconnect harness con-

nector (2).5. Remove fusible link holder mounting nut (3) to remove battery

terminal with fusible link (4).


1 : Harness mounting nut

2 : Fusible link holder mounting nut

3 : Harness connector

4 : Battery terminal with fusible link

JPMIA0490ZZ

JPMIA0491ZZ

Harness mounting nut

: 13.2 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)Fusible link holder mounting nut

: 13.2 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)


[POWER SUPPLY & GROUND CIRCUIT]SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Battery INFOID:0000000004248160

Type 80D23L

20 hour rate capacity [V - Ah] 12 - 62

Cold cranking current (For reference value) [A] 582


BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

C

D

E

SECTION PWCA

B

POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

WC

N

O

P

CONTENTS

P




ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .....................................5

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ......5ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re-pair Requirement .......................................................5




POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ............................... 7System Diagram .......................................................7System Description ...................................................7Component Parts Location ......................................9Component Description ...........................................10

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................11

COMMON ITEM .........................................................11COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) .....................................................11

RETAIND PWR ..........................................................12RETAIND PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) ...................................................12


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......13

BCM ...........................................................................13BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ....................................13

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ............................13POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ................................................................13

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH .............................14POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ................................................................14

POWER WINDOW MOTOR ..............................16

DRIVER SIDE .............................................................16DRIVER SIDE : Description .....................................16DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ..........16DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .....................16DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ...................17



ENCODER .........................................................20

DRIVER SIDE .............................................................20DRIVER SIDE : Description .....................................20DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ..........20DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .....................20


....22PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............22

POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK .....................25

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ............................25POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Description ....25

PWC-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Component Function Check ....................................................... 25POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 25

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH ............................ 26POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Description ..... 26POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Component Function Check ....................................................... 26POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................................... 27

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 29

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................. 29Reference Value ..................................................... 29Wiring Diagram - BCM - ......................................... 52Fail-safe .................................................................. 57DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 59DTC Index .............................................................. 61

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH .................... 64Reference Value ..................................................... 64Wiring Diagram - POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM - ............................................................... 66Fail-Safe ................................................................. 69

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH ..................... 71Reference Value ..................................................... 71Wiring Diagram - POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM - ............................................................... 73Fail-Safe ................................................................. 76

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 78

POWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE WITH ANY POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ...... 78

Description .............................................................. 78Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 78

DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................... 79

Description .............................................................. 79Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 79

PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE ......................... 80

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OP-ERATED .................................................................... 80

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OP-ERATED : Description ............................................ 80WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OP-ERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 80

WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OP-ERATED .................................................................... 80

WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OP-ERATED : Description ............................................ 80WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OP-ERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 80

WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH .................... 80

WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Descrip-tion .......................................................................... 80WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagno-sis Procedure .......................................................... 81

ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-ATE .................................................................... 82

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 82DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 82DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 82

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 82PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 82PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 82

AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATES NORMALLY ......... 83

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 83DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 83

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 83PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 83

POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMAL-LY ....................................................................... 84

Description .............................................................. 84Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 84

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS ........................ 85


KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE ................................................. 86


POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION ................................................ 87

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87

POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE .................................. 88

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 88DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 88

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 88PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 88

AUTOMATIC WINDOW ADJUSTING FUNC-TION DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 89

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 89


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P

P

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .....................89

PASSENGER SIDE ...................................................89PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............89

PRECAUTION ..............................................91

PRECAUTIONS ..................................................91

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" .................................................................91Precaution for Battery Service .................................91

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............92

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ...................92Removal and Installation .........................................92




DETAILED FLOW



>> GO TO 2.



>> GO TO 3.



>> GO TO 4.



>> GO TO 5.



>> GO TO 6.

6.FINAL CHECK




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-scription INFOID:0000000004555577

When the battery negative terminal is disconnected, the initialization is necessary.If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary as well as when the negativebattery terminal is disconnected.• Power supply to the power window switch or power window motor is cut off by removal of battery terminal or

if the battery fuse is blown.• Disconnection and connection of power window switch harness connector.• Removal and installation of motor from regulator assembly.• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.• Removal and installation of door glass or door glass run.The following specified operations cannot be performed under the non initialized condition.• Auto-up operation• Anti-pinch function• Key cylinder switch power window function• Automatic window adjusting function

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004555578

INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE1. Disconnect battery negative terminal or power window switch connector. Reconnect it after a minute or

more. 2. Door switch is OFF (close).3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is

already fully open.)5. Continue pulling the power window switch AUTO-UP. Even after glass stops at the fully closed position,

keep pulling the switch for 3 seconds or more. 6. Initializing procedure is completed.7. Inspect anti-pinch function.CAUTION:When initialization is not complete, power window UP does not operate while door is open.

CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION1. Fully open the door window.2. Place a piece of wood near the fully closed position.3. Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP.• Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops.• Check that glass does not rise when operating the power window main switch while lowering.CAUTION:• Never check with hands and other part of body because they may be pinched. Never get pinched.• Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.• It may switch to fail-safe mode if open/close operation is performed continuously. Perform initial

setting in that situation. Refer to PWC-69, "Fail-Safe"• Perform initial setting when auto-up operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.• Finish initial setting. Otherwise, next operation cannot be performed.1. Auto-up operation2. Anti-pinch function3. Key cylinder switch power window function4. Automatic window adjusting functionADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT



When the control unit is replaced, the initialization is necessary.If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary and the control unit must be dis-connected.• Power supply to the power window switch or power window motor is cut off by removal of battery terminal or

if the battery fuse is blown.• Disconnection and connection of power window switch harness connector.• Removal and installation of motor from regulator assembly.• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.• Removal and installation of door glass or door glass run.The following specified operations cannot be performed under the non initialized condition.• Auto-up operation• Anti-pinch function• Key cylinder switch power window function• Automatic window adjusting function


INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE1. Disconnect battery negative terminal or power window switch connector. Reconnect it after a minute or

more. 2. Door switch is OFF (close).3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is

already fully open.)5. Continue pulling the power window switch AUTO-UP. Even after glass stops at the fully closed position,

keep pulling the switch for 3 seconds or more. 6. Initializing procedure is completed.7. Inspect anti-pinch function.CAUTION:When initialization is not complete, power window UP does not operate while door is open.

CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION1. Fully open the door window.2. Place a piece of wood near the fully closed position.3. Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP.• Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops.• Check that glass does not rise when operating the power window switch while lowering.CAUTION:• Never check with hands and other part of body because they may be pinched. Never get pinched.• Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.• It may switch to fail-safe mode if open/close operation is performed continuously. Perform initial

setting in that situation. Refer to PWC-69, "Fail-Safe"• Perform initial setting when auto-up operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.• Finish initial setting. Otherwise, next operation cannot be performed.1. Auto-up operation2. Anti-pinch function3. Key cylinder switch power window function4. Automatic window adjusting function


POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONPOWER WINDOW SYSTEM



POWER WINDOW SYSTEM• Power window system is activated by power window switch operation when ignition switch is turned ON and

during the retained power operation, after ignition switch turned OFF.• Power window main switch can open/close all windows.• Power window sub-switch can open/close the passenger side windows.• AUTO operation can be activated by operating the power window switch once.• It transmits and receives the signal between BCM and power window main switch or power window sub

switch, via serial communication.• When pressing power window lock switch, operation other than power window main switch becomes impos-

sible.• When detecting the pinching resistance of foreign materials, etc. during power window AUTO UP operation,

it lowers door glass to the specified value.• When opening driver side or passenger side door while door glass is being fully closed, it lowers door glass

of the door a little from the closed position. When closing the door, it return door glass to the fully closedposition.

• All power windows open or close when Intelligent Key unlock button is pressed for 3seconds.• Hold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK direction for 1 second or more to OPEN or CLOSE all

power windows when ignition switch OFF.

POWER WINDOW AUTO-OPERATION• AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch turns to AUTO.• Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch

as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating.• Power window switch reads the changes of encoder signal and stops AUTO operation when door glass is at

the fully open/closed position.• Auto function is inoperable if encoder is malfunctioning.

JMKIA3418GB


POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINKPower window main switch, power window sub-switch and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power win-dow serial link.The under mentioned signal is transmitted from BCM to power window main switch.• Driver side door switch signal.• Keyless power window down signal.• Retained power operation signal. The under mentioned signal is transmitted from BCM to power window sub-switch.• Passenger side door switch signal.• Keyless power window down signal.• Retained power operation signal. The following signal is transmitted from power window main switch to power window sub-switch.• Passenger side door window operation signal.• Power window lock signal.• Power window control by key cylinder switch signal.

RETAINED POWER OPERATIONRetained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to oper-ate for 45 seconds after ignition switch turns OFF.RETAINED POWER FUNCTION CANCEL CONDITIONS• Front door CLOSED (door switch OFF) →OPEN (door switch ON).• When ignition switch turns ON again.• When timer times out. (45 seconds)

POWER WINDOW LOCK FUNCTIONGround circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibitspower window switch operation except with the power window main switch.

ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION• The anti-pinch function detects foreign matter being pinched in the door glass, during AUTO-UP operation,

and lowers the door glass 150 mm (5.9in).• Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch

as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating.• Resistance is applied to the power window motor rotation that changes the frequency of encoder pulse sig-

nal if foreign material is trapped in the door glass.• Power window switch controls to lower the door glass for 150 mm (5.9in) after it detects encoder pulse signal

frequency change.OPERATION CONDITION• When all door glass AUTO-UP operation is performed (anti-pinch function does not operate just before the

door glass closes and is fully closed.)NOTE:Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the door glass, itmay lower.

AUTOMATIC WINDOW ADJUSTING FUNCTIONWhen the driver/passenger door(s) is open, the window of the opened door is lowered approximately 10 mm(0.39 in).When the door is closed, the window is raised to the fully closed position.Automatic window adjusting function system (opening operation) does not operate when the following itemoccurs.• The window is 10 mm (0.39 in) or more open from the fully closed position.Automatic window adjusting function system (closing operation) does not operate when the following itemoccurs.• The automatic window adjusting function system (opening operation) operation.

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH POWER WINDOW FUNCTIONHold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK position for 1 second or more to OPEN or CLOSE allpower windows when ignition switch is OFF. In addition, it stops when the key position is NEUTRAL whenoperating.OPERATION CONDITION• Ignition switch OFF.• Hold door key cylinder to the LOCK position for 1 second or more to perform CLOSE operation of the door

glass.


POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

• Hold door key cylinder in the UNLOCK position for 1 second or more to perform OPEN operation of the doorglass.

KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN FUNCTIONAll power windows open when the unlock button on Intelligent Key is activated and pressed and held for morethan 3* seconds with the ignition switch OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuouslypressed.The power window opening function stops when the following operations are performed.• When the unlock button is pressed and held for more than 15 seconds.• When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.• When the unlock button is released.While retained power operation activates, keyless power window down function cannot be operated.Keyless power window down operation mode can be changed by “PW DOWN SET” mode in “WORK SUP-PORT”. Refer to DLK-49, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".NOTE:Use CONSULT-III to change settings.MODE 1 (3 sec) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (5 sec)

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEMPower window switch incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumptionaccording the vehicle status.LOW POWER CONSUMPTION MODE• Ignition switch OFF.• Power window main switch and power window sub-switch do not receive a signal from serial link.• Power window motor does not move.If any of the following conditions are satisfied, the low power consumption mode is released.• Ignition switch ON.• When key cylinder switch signal is received.• When door lock signal is received.• When the signal is received from serial link.


JMKIA3545ZZ


POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1. BCM M118,M119,M122,M123 2. Driver side door lock assembly (door key cylinder switch) D15

3. Driver side power window motor D10

4. Power window main switch D8 5. Driver side door switch B16 6. Remote keyless entry receiver

A. View with dash side lower (passen-ger side)

B. View with door finisher removed C. View with instrument lower panel (passenger side) removed

Component Function

BCM• Supplies power supply to power window switches.• Controls retained power.

Power window main switch• Directly controls all power window motor of all doors.• Controls anti-pinch operation of power window.

Power window sub-switch• Controls anti-pinch operation of power window.• Controls power window motor of passenger door.

Power window motor• Integrates the ENCODER and WINDOW MOTOR.• Starts operating with signals from each power window switch.• Transmits power window motor rotation as a pulse signal to power window switch.

Driver side door lock assembly (door key cylinder switch)

Transmits operation condition of key cylinder switch to power window main switch.

Door switch Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM.

Remote keyless entry receiver Receives lock/unlock signal from the intelligent Key, and then transmits to BCM.


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P





×: Applicable item

NOTE:


FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays onCONSULT-III.


















— AIR CONDITONER*

• Intelligent Key system• Engine start system

INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×





Trunk lid open TRUNK × ×


RAP system RETAINED PWR* ×




RETAIND PWR

RETAIND PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000004249741

Data monitor

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Vehicle Condition

SLEEP>LOCK

Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected

While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)





CRANK>RUNWhile turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From cranking up the engine to run it)

RUN>URGENTWhile turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-gency stop operation)





OFF>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCK>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCKPower supply position is “LOCK” (Ignition switch OFF with steer-ing is locked.)

OFFPower supply position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.)


ONPower supply position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)

ENGINE RUNPower supply position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)


IGN Counter 0 - 39

The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition

whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.

Monitor Item Description

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISPOWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITBCM








Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness.



Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair harness or connector.

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004555584


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.



K (40A)

11 10 (10A)

(+)

(−)Voltage

(Approx.)BCM

Connector Terminal


M119 11

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 13 Existed


Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 2.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer toBCS-81, "Exploded View" NO >> Repair or replace harness.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.


POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004555585


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window sub-switch connector.3. Check voltage between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.

(+)


Power window main switch

Connector Terminal

D8 1


BCM Power window main switchContinuity


M1182

D81

Existed3 10

BCM

Ground


M1182

Not existed3


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D8 15 Existed

(+)


Power window sub-switch

Connector Terminal

D38 10 Ground Battery voltage



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window sub-switch harness connector.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer toBCS-81, "Exploded View" NO >> Repair or replace harness.


Check continuity between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.


BCM Power window sub-switchContinuity


M118 2 D38 10 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M118 2 Not existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D38 11 Existed


POWER WINDOW MOTOR
POWER WINDOW MOTORDRIVER SIDE


Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal from power window main switch.


1.CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT

Check driver side power window motor operation with power window main switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Driver side power window motor is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-16, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect driver side power window motor connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between driver side power window motor harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Check driver side power window motor.Refer to PWC-17, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace driver side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation".


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.3. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and driver side power window

motor harness connector.

4. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.

(+)


Driver side power window motor

Connector Terminal

D10

6

GroundPower window main switch

UP Battery voltage

DOWN 0

3UP 0

DOWN Battery voltage

Power window main switch Driver side power window motorContinuity


D88

D106

Existed11 3


POWER WINDOW MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.



>> INSPECTION END


COMPONENT INSPECTION

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW MOTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect driver side power window motor connector.3. Check motor operation by connecting the battery voltage directly to driver side power window motor con-

nector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Driver side power window motor is OK.NO >> Replace driver side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


Door glass moves UP/DOWN by receiving the signal power window main switch or power window sub-switch .


1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT

Check passenger side power window motor operation with power window main switch or power window subswitch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Passenger side power window motor is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-17, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect passenger side power window motor connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between passenger side power window motor harness connector and ground.


Ground


D88

Not existed11

Driver side power window mo-tor connector

TerminalMotor operation

(+) (–)

D103 6 DOWN

6 3 UP


POWER WINDOW MOTOR

2.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Check passenger side power window motor. Refer to PWC-18, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace passenger side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation".


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window sub-switch connector.3. Check continuity between power window sub-switch harness connector and passenger side power win-

dow motor harness connector.

4. Check continuity between power window sub-switch connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window sub-switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace harness.



>> INSPECTION END


COMPONENT INSPECTION


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect passenger side power window motor connector.3. Check motor operation by connecting the battery voltage directly to passenger side power window motor

connector.

(+)(–)


Passenger side power window motor

Connector Terminal

D40

6

GroundPower window sub- switch

UP Battery voltage

DOWN 0

3UP 0

DOWN Battery voltage

Power window sub-switch Passenger side power window motorContinuity


D389

D403

Existed8 6


Ground


D388

Not existed9


POWER WINDOW MOTOR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Passenger side power window motor is OK.NO >> Replace passenger side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation".

Passenger side power window motor connector

TerminalMotor condition

(+) (–)

D403 6 DOWN

6 3 UP


ENCODER
ENCODERDRIVER SIDE


Detects condition of the driver side power window motor operation and transmits to power window main switchas the pulse signal.


1.CHECK ENCODER OPERATION

Check that driver side door glass performs AUTO open/close operation normally with power window mainswitch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Encoder operation is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-20, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".



1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window main switch connector and driver side power window motor connector.3. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and driver side power window



(+)

(–)Signal

(Reference value) Power window main switch

Connector Terminal

D89

Ground Refer to the following signal13

JMKIA2682GB



D89

D105

Existed13 2


ENCODER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P


3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1

1. Connect power window main switch connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between driver side power window motor harness connector and ground.






Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.

5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1






Ground


D89

Not existed13

(+)


Driver side power window motor

Connector Terminal




D8 5 D10 4 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D8 5 Not existed



D8 14 D10 1 Existed


ENCODER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >1. Connect power window main switch connector.2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace driver side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".

PASSENGER SIDE


Detects condition of the passenger side power window motor operation and transmits to power window sub-switch as the pulse signal.



Check that passenger side door glass performs AUTO open operation normally with power window mainswitch or power window sub-switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Encoder operation is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-22, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check signal between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window sub-switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window sub-switch connector and passenger side power window motor connector.3. Check continuity between power window sub-switch harness connector and passenger side power win-



GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D8 14 Existed

(+)

(–)Signal

(Reference value)Power window sub-switch

Connector Terminal

D3812

Ground Refer to the following signal15

JMKIA2927GB


ENCODER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

4. Check continuity between power window sub-switch connector and ground.



1. Connect power window sub-switch connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between passenger side power window motor harness connector and ground.





4. Check continuity between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window sub-switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair or replace harness.






D3812

D402

Existed15 5


Ground


D3812

Not existed15

(+)


Passenger side power window motor

Connector Terminal




D38 4 D40 4 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D38 4 Not existed


ENCODER


1. Connect power window sub-switch connector.2. Check continuity between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace passenger side power window motor. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace power window sub-switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".



D38 3 D40 1 Existed


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

D38 3 Existed


POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINKPOWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000004639997

Power window main switch, power window sub-switch and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power win-dow serial link.The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to power window main switch, power window sub-switch.• Keyless power window down signalThe signal mentioned below is transmitted from power window main switch to power window sub-switch.• Front passenger side door window operation signal• Power window control by key cylinder switch signal• Power window lock switch signal• Retained power operation signal

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004555601

1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-IIICheck (“CDL LOCK SW ”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYS-TEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer toDLK-46, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMONITEM)".

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Power window serial link is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-25, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004555602


1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK SIGNAL


CDL LOCK SW LOCK : ON

UNLOCK : OFF

CDL UNLOCK SW LOCK : OFF

UNLOCK : ON

(+)

(–)Signal

(Reference value)Power window main switch

Connector Terminal

D8 12 Ground

JPMIA0013GB


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.

3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between BCM connector and power window main switch connector.

4. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace harness.



>> INSPECTION END POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000004640002

Power window main switch, power window sub-switch and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power win-dow serial link.The signal mentioned below is transmitted from BCM to power window main switch, power window sub-switch.• Keyless power window down signalThe signal mentioned below is transmitted from power window main switch to power window sub-switch.• Front passenger side door window operation signal• Power window control by key cylinder switch signal• Power window lock switch signal• Retained power operation signal

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004555604


With CONSULT-III

(+)



Connector Terminal


BCM Power window main switchContinuity


M123 132 D8 12 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

Check (“CDL LOCK SW ”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYS-TEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer toDLK-46, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMONITEM)" .

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Power window serial link is OK.NO >> Refer to PWC-27, "POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".

POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004555605


1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check signal between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace power window sub-switch. Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation". NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect power window sub-switch connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between power window sub-switch harness connector and ground.


3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and power window sub-switch connector.3. Check continuity between BCM connector and power window sub-switch connector.


CDL LOCK SW LOCK : ON

UNLOCK : OFF

CDL UNLOCK SW LOCK : OFF

UNLOCK : ON

(+)

(−)Signal

(Reference value)Power window sub-switch

Connector Terminal

D38 16 Ground

JPMIA0013GB

(+)



Connector Terminal



4. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace harness.

BCM Power window sub-switchContinuity


M123 132 D38 16 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal



BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

















position




















Off






Off



Off


Off










Off




Off


Off






Trunk lid opened On











RKE-MODE CHG


Off









Off




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P


Off








Off



BRAKE SW 1



On



DETE/CANCL SW


Off


On

















SFT PN -IPDM


Off


On







ENGINE STATE

Engine stopped Stop



Engine running Run





S/L RELAY-REQ


Off


On


ometer reading


ometer reading

DOOR STAT-DR




DOOR STAT-AS









Reset




the Intelligent Key


—

CONFRM ID ALL


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID4


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID3


Yet


Done




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

CONFIRM ID2


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID1


Yet


Done










tire


tire


tire


tire















TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JPMIA0062ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P


Description

ConditionValue


1(W)


2(Y)



3(O)



4(LG)


Output


0 V


12 V

5(P)




12 V


0 V

7(SB)


OFF 12 V

8(V)




12 V


0 V

9(G)




12 V


0 V

11(R)


13(B)


14(W)


Output Tail lamp

OFF 0 V

ON



15(O)



Battery voltage

ACC 0 V

JSNIA0010GB


17(W)





6.5 V

18(O)




6.5 V

19(V)



OFF 12 V

ON 0 V

20(V)




6.5 V

23(L)



12 V


0 V

25(Y)




6.5 V

30(P)


ON 0 V

OFF 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

34(SB)





35(V)





38(B)


Output





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


39(W)


Output




47(Y)



ON 0 V

50(R)




11.8 V


52(SB)




12 V


0 V



Battery voltage


0 V

61(SB)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

64(L)



Sounding 0 V

Not sounding 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

67(GR)



Pressed 0 V

Not pressed

11.8 V

72(R)





73(G)






Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


74(SB)


Output




75(BR)


Output




76(V)


Output





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

77(LG)


Output




78(Y)





79(BR)






Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


80(GR)


Input/Output



move.

81(W)


Input/Output



move.

82(R)



ON 12 V

83(Y)


Input/Output

During waiting


87(Y)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0064GB

JMKIA0065GB

JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

88(O)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

89(BR)



Pressed 0 V


90(P)


— —

91(L)


— —

92(LG)


OFF 0 V

Blinking

6.5 V

ON 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0015GB


93(Y)



Battery voltage

ON 0 V

95(O)


ACC or ON 12 V

96(GR)


Output — 12 V

97(L)



UNLOCK status 12 V

98(P)



UNLOCK status 0 V

99(R)

Ground


Input




ASCD clutch switch


0 V


12 V


ICC clutch switch


0 V


12 V

100(Y)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

101(P)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

102(O)



ON 12 V

103(LG)



106(W)



ON 0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0016GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

107(LG)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0039GB


108(R)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0039GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

109(W)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND

1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

110(G)


ON 0 V

OFF

1.1 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0012GB


111(Y)


Input/Output

Steering lock

LOCK status 12 V

LOCK or UNLOCK


12 V


0 V

113(O)



Close to 5 V


Close to 0 V

114(R)




0 V


Battery voltage

116(SB)


118(BR)

Ground


Input

Stop lamp switch


0 V


Battery voltage



0 V


Battery voltage

119(SB)


Input Driver door


1.1 V


0 V

121(SB)



12 V


0 V

123(W)


ON Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0066GB

JPMIA0012GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

124(LG)



OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

129(O)



CANCEL

1.1 V

ON 0 V

132(V)


Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

10.2 V


133(L)




ON (Tail lamps ON)



OFF 0 V

134(LG)


OFF Battery voltage

ON 0 V

137(O)



138(V)



ACC or ON 5.0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0012GB

JPMIA0013GB

JPMIA0159GB


139(L)


Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

Standby state


140(GR)




141(R)


ON 0 V

Blinking

11.3 V

OFF 12 V

142(BR)


Output



Lighting switch 1ST

10.7 V

Lighting switch HI

Lighting switch 2ND


143(V)




0 V


10.7 V



Description

ConditionValue


OCC3881D

OCC3880D

JPMIA0014GB

JPMIA0031GB

JPMIA0032GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

144(G)




0 V


10.7 V


145(L)


Output




10.7 V



146(SB)


Output




10.7 V

Lighting switch 2ND



149(W)


Input — 12 V

150(R)


OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

151(G)



Active 0 V



Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0033GB

JPMIA0034GB

JPMIA0035GB

JPMIA0011GB



JCMWM3046GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

JCMWM3047GB


JCMWM3048GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

JCMWM3049GB


JCMWM3050GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P



JCMWM3051GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P



























Priority DTC



3


4




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P


NOTE:The details of time display are as follows.• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to PWC-11, "COM-MON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".

5



Priority DTC






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


— — — — —

U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-35











B2555: STOP LAMP — × — — SEC-59









B2604: PNP SW × × × — SEC-73

B2605: PNP SW × × × — SEC-75

B2606: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-77

B2607: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-78


B2609: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-82






B2612: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-94





B2618: BCM × × × — PCS-58

B2619: BCM × × × — SEC-100



— SEC-101






— SEC-92


— SEC-93










lamp ON

Refer-ence page



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — ×

WT-19C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — ×

C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — ×

C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — ×









C1720: [CODE ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-26C1721: [CODE ERR] FR — — — ×

C1722: [CODE ERR] RR — — — ×

C1723: [CODE ERR] RL — — — ×












lamp ON

Refer-ence page




TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES


JMKIA1191ZZ


Description

ConditionVoltage [V](Approx.)

+ - Signal name Input/Output

1(Y)

Ground Battery power supply Input — Battery voltage

5(O)

Ground Encoder power supply OutputWhen ignition switch ON or automatic window ad-justing operates

Battery voltage

8LHD(L)

RHD(GR)

GroundDriver side power window mo-tor UP signal

OutputWhen power window main switch (Driver side) is op-erated UP

Battery voltage

9LHD(LG)RHD(W)

Ground Encoder pulse signal 2 InputWhen power window mo-tor operates

10(SB)

Ground Ignition switch power signal InputIGN SW ON Battery voltage

IGN SW OFF 0

11LHD(BR)RHD(P)

GroundDriver side power window mo-tor DOWN signal

OutputWhen power window main switch (Driver side) is op-erated DOWN

Battery voltage

12(V)

Ground Power window serial linkInput/Output

Ignition switch ON

JMKIA0070GB

JPMIA0013GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

13(R)

Ground Encoder pulse signal 1 InputWhen power window mo-tor operates

14(G)

Ground Encoder ground — — 0

15(B)

Ground Ground — — 0


Description


+ - Signal name Input/Output

JMKIA0070GB


Wiring Diagram - POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004249779

JCKWM2145GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

JCKWM2146GB


JCKWM2147GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P


FAIL-SAFE CONTROLSwitches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed anddirection of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when a signal that is out of the specified value is detectedbetween the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.

JCKWM2148GB


In fail-safe control, the system changes to a non-initialized condition and the following function do not operate.• AUTO UP operation• Anti-pinch function• Automatic window adjusting function• Door key cylinder switch power window function

When fail-safe control is activated, perform initializing operation to recover. If a malfunction is detected inpower window switch or more, fail-safe control is activated again.

Malfunction Malfunction condition

Pulse sensor malfunctionWhen one pulse signal that is the specified value or more is detected continuously for the specified time or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Both pulse sensor mal-function

When both pulse signal are not detected continuously for the specified time or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Pulse direction malfunc-tion

When a pulse indicating that the window is moving in the opposite direction against the power win-dow motor is detected for the specified value or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Glass recognition position malfunction 1

When the actual door glass position that is out of the specified value is detected compared to the door glass fully closed position memorized in module, while door is being operated UP or DOWN.


When pulse count that is out of door glass full stroke value or more is detected, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Fully closed position up-date malfunction

When door glass is continuously operated UP and DOWN for the specified value or more without fully closing door glass (approximately 10 times or more).



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P



TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JMKIA0134ZZ


Description


+ - Signal nameInput/Output

3(G)

Ground Encoder ground — — 0

4(O)

Ground Encoder power supply OutputWhen ignition switch ON or automatic window operates adjusting

Battery voltage

8LHD(L)

RHD(GR)

GroundPower window motorUP signal

OutputWhen power window motor isoperated UP

Battery voltage

9LHD(BR)RHD(P)

GroundPower window motor DOWN signal

OutputWhen power window motor isoperated DOWN

Battery voltage

10(SB)

Ground Battery power supply Input — Battery voltage

11(B)


12(R)

Ground Encoder pulse signal 1 InputWhen power window motor operates

JMKIA0070GB


15LHD(LG)RHD(SB)

Ground Encoder pulse signal 2 InputWhen power window motor operates

16(Y)

Ground Power window serial linkInput/Output

Ignition switch ON


Description


+ - Signal nameInput/Output

JMKIA0070GB

JPMIA0013GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

Wiring Diagram - POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004249782

JCKWM2145GB


JCKWM2146GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

JCKWM2147GB



FAIL-SAFE CONTROLSwitches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed anddirection of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when a signal that is out of the specified value is detectedbetween the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.

JCKWM2148GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

In fail-safe control, the system changes to a non-initialized condition and the following function do not operate.• AUTO UP operation• Anti-pinch function• Automatic window adjusting function• Door key cylinder switch power window function

When fail-safe control is activated, perform initializing operation to recover. If a malfunction is detected inpower window switch or more, fail-safe control is activated again.

Malfunction Malfunction condition

Pulse sensor malfunctionWhen one pulse signal that is the specified value or more is detected continuously for the specified time or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Both pulse sensor mal-function

When both pulse signal are not detected continuously for the specified time or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Pulse direction malfunc-tion

When a pulse indicating that the window is moving in the opposite direction against the power win-dow motor is detected for the specified value or more, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.


When the actual door glass position that is out of the specified value is detected compared to the door glass fully closed position memorized in module, while door is being operated UP or DOWN.


When pulse count that is out of door glass full stroke value or more is detected, while door glass is being operated UP or DOWN.

Fully closed position up-date malfunction

When door glass is continuously operated UP and DOWN for the specified value or more without fully closing door glass (approximately 10 times or more).


POWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE WITH ANY POWER WINDOW SWITCH-ES


SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISPOWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE WITH ANY POWER WINDOWSWITCHES


All power windows do not operate via power window main switch and power window sub-switch.


1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.Refer to PWC-13, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.


Confirm the operation again.Is the result normal?YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer toGI-41, "Intermittent Incident" NO >> GO TO 1.


DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE


Driver side power window does not operate using power window main switch.


1.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit.Refer to PWC-13, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Check driver side power window motor. Refer to PWC-16, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE
PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATEWHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Description INFOID:0000000004555610

Passenger side power window operates using power window sub-switch but does not operate using powerwindow main switch.

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis ProcedureINFOID:0000000004555611

1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power window sub-switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-14, "POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT

Check power window sub-switch serial link circuit. Refer to PWC-26, "POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OPERATED

WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OPERATED : Description INFOID:0000000004555612

Passenger side power window operates using power window main switch but not using power window sub-switch.

WHEN POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis ProcedureINFOID:0000000004555613

1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power window sub-switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to PWC-14, "POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH

WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-


PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW ALONE DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000004555614

Passenger side power window operates using power window main switch and power window sub-switch.

WITH BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004555615


Check passenger side power window motor. Refer to PWC-17, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE


Anti-pinch function does not operate when power window up operated.


1.CHECK AUTO UP OPERATION

Check AUTO UP operation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to PWC-83, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".



PASSENGER SIDE


Anit-pinch function does not operate when power window up operated.



Check AUTO UP operation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to PWC-83, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".




AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATES NORMAL-LY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATESNORMALLYDRIVER SIDE



Initialization procedure is performed and operation is confirmed.Refer to PWC-5, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : SpecialRepair Requirement".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ENCODER (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT

Check encoder (driver side) circuit. Refer to PWC-20, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.



PASSENGER SIDE




2.CHECK ENCODER (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT

Check encoder (passenger side) circuit. Refer to PWC-22, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NOR-MALLY


POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATENORMALLY


Retained power function does not operate after ignition switch turns OFF.


1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch. Refer to DLK-62, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WIN-DOWS


Power window does not operate when locking or unlocking a door using door key cylinder.



Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.Refer to PWC-5, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : SpecialRepair Requirement".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)

Check driver side door lock assembly (door key cylinder switch).Refer to DLK-73, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE
KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE


Power window down does not operate when pressing unlock button on Intelligent Key.


1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

Check remote keyless entry function.Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to DLK-169, "Description".

2.CHECK POWER WINDOW OPERATION

Check power window operation.Does power window operate up/down using power window main switch?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Refer to DLK-169, "Diagnosis Procedure".

3.CHECK “PW DOWN SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

Check “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.Refer to DLK-49, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Set “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.




POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION


1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

Replace power window main switch.

>> Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".


POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATEDRIVER SIDE


1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

Replace power window main switch.

>> Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".PASSENGER SIDE


1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH

Replace power window sub-switch.

>> Refer to PWC-92, "Removal and Installation".


AUTOMATIC WINDOW ADJUSTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P


P

AUTOMATIC WINDOW ADJUSTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATEDRIVER SIDE



Check AUTO UP operation.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Refer to PWC-83, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.Refer to DLK-62, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK (POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH)

Check power window serial link (power window main switch)Refer to PWC-25, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Component Function Check"Is the result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts



PASSENGER SIDE




2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.Refer to DLK-62, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK (POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH)

Check power window serial link (power window sub-switch)Refer to PWC-26, "POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH : Component Function Check"Is the result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts


AUTOMATIC WINDOW ADJUSTING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE



PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

WC

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

P













REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONPOWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH


REMOVAL1. Remove the door finisher.

Refer to INT-11, "Removal and Installation".2. Power window main switch (1) is removed from door finisher

using flat-bladed screw driver (A) etc.

CAUTION:Do not fold the pawl of power window main switch finisher.NOTE:The same procedure is also performed for power window sub-switch.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.NOTE:Power window main switch is exchanged or is detached it is necessary to do the initialization procedure.Refer to PWC-6, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-ment".

: Pawl

JMKIA3526ZZ



C

D

E

BSECTION PWO

A

POWER OUTLET

WO

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

O

P

N

CONTENTS

P


CIGARETTE LIGHTER ....................................... 2Wiring Diagram - CIGARETTE LIGHTER - ...............2

POWER SOCKET ............................................... 4Wiring Diagram - POWER SOCKET - .......................4

PRECAUTION ............................................... 6

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...................................................................6

Precaution for Battery Service .................................. 6

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 7

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ...................................... 7Exploded View .......................................................... 7Removal and Installation .......................................... 7

POWER SOCKET .............................................. 8Exploded View .......................................................... 8Removal and Installation .......................................... 8

PWO-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

CIGARETTE LIGHTER
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISCIGARETTE LIGHTER

Wiring Diagram - CIGARETTE LIGHTER - INFOID:0000000004247733

JCMWM3042GB


WO

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3043GB


POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET

Wiring Diagram - POWER SOCKET - INFOID:0000000004247734

JCMWM3044GB


WO

POWER SOCKET

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


JCMWM3045GB


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >












WO

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

P


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONCIGARETTE LIGHTER



REMOVAL1. Remove console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove the screws (A) from reverse side cigarette lighter

socket (1).

3. Pull out cigarette lighter (1).

4. Pull out cigarette lighter socket (2) by pushing the cigarettelighter ring pawl (C) from the cigarette lighter socket hole(square) (B).

5. Remove cigarette lighter ring (3) from console finisher assemblywhile pressing pawls.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.NOTE:Align the cut outs of cigarette lighter socket and cigarette lighter ring.

1 : Cigarette lighter

2 : Cigarette lighter socket

3 : Cigarette lighter ring

JPMIA0494ZZ

JPMIA0493ZZ

A : Cut out

JPMIA0492ZZ


POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET



REMOVAL1. Remove rear upper console assembly (A/T models) or center console assembly (M/T models). Refer to

IP-24, "Removal and Installation".2. Disconnect power socket connector (A).

3. Pull out inner socket (2) by pushing the ring pawl (B) from theinner socket hole (square) (D).

4. Remove ring (1) from console box while pressing pawls.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal. NOTE:Align the cut outs of inner socket and ring.

1 : Ring

2 : Inner socket

JPLIA0098ZZ

C : Cut out

JPLIA0109ZZ


TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

C

E

SECTION RAXA

B

AX
R
REAR AXLE

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONTENTS

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ......................................2

PRECAUTION ............................................... 3

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3Precautions for Drive Shaft .......................................3

PREPARATION ............................................ 4

PREPARATION ................................................... 4Special Service Tool .................................................4Commercial Service Tool ..........................................4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5

REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................. 5Inspection ..................................................................5

REAR DRIVE SHAFT .......................................... 6

Inspection ................................................................. 6


REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................ 7Exploded View .......................................................... 7Removal and Installation .......................................... 8Inspection ................................................................. 9

REAR DRIVE SHAFT ........................................11Exploded View .........................................................11Removal and Installation .........................................11Disassembly and Assembly .....................................12Inspection ................................................................16

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................17

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................17

Wheel Bearing .........................................................17Drive Shaft ...............................................................17

RAX-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISNOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000004670155

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

×: Applicable

Reference page —

RA

X-1

6

—

RA

X-7

—

NV

H in

DLN

sec

tion.

NV

H in

DLN

sec

tion.

NV

H in

RA

X a

nd R

SU

sec

tions

.

Ref

er to

RE

AR

AX

LE in

this

cha

rt.

NV

H in

WT

sec

tion.

NV

H in

WT

sec

tion.

Ref

er to

DR

IVE

SH

AF

T in

this

cha

rt.

NV

H in

BR

sec

tion.

NV

H in

ST

sec

tion.

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Exc

essi

ve jo

int a

ngle

Join

t slid

ing

resi

stan

ce

Imba

lanc

e

Impr

oper

inst

alla

tion,

loos

enes

s

Par

ts in

terf

eren

ce

PR

OP

ELL

ER

SH

AF

T

DIF

FE

RE

NT

IAL

RE

AR

AX

LE A

ND

RE

AR

SU

SP

EN

SIO

N

RE

AR

AX

LE

TIR

E

RO

AD

WH

EE

L

DR

IVE

SH

AF

T

BR

AK

E

ST

EE

RIN

G

Symptom

DRIVE SHAFT

Noise × × × × × × × × × ×

Shake × × × × × × × × ×

REAR AXLE

Noise × × × × × × × × × ×

Shake × × × × × × × × ×

Vibration × × × × × × ×

Shimmy × × × × × × ×

Judder × × × × × ×

Poor quality ride or handling × × × × ×


PRECAUTIONS

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

R


Precautions for Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000004670156

• Observe the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft.• Never disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts.• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.• Clean the parts, before disassembling and assembling.• Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location.• Reassemble disassembled parts carefully in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be

placed over parts.• Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.• Clean disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with

air or wiping with paper waste.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >




Tool number (Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

KV38100500( − )Drifta: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.

Installing drive shaft plug

KV38102200( − )Drifta: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.

Installing drive shaft plug

KV40107300( − )Boot band crimping tool

Installing boot band

ZZA0701D

ZZA0920D

ZZA1229D


Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E


REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

PERIODIC MAINTENANCEREAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING

Inspection INFOID:0000000004670159

MOUNTING INSPECTIONMake sure the mounting conditions (looseness, back lash) of each component and component conditions(wear, damage) are normal.

WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION• Move wheel hub and bearing assembly in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of

wheel bearing.

• Rotate wheel hub and bearing assembly and make sure that is no unusual noise or other irregular condi-tions. If there is any of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.

StandardAxial end play : Refer to RAX-17, "Wheel Bearing".


REAR DRIVE SHAFT
REAR DRIVE SHAFT


• Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage.• Check boot for cracks and other damage.

CAUTION:Replace entire drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occurs from drive shaft.



C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONREAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING


WITHOUT ADJUSTING CAP AND SPRING WASHER FOR WHEEL HUB LOCK NUT

WITH ADJUSTING CAP AND SPRING WASHER FOR WHEEL HUB LOCK NUT

JPDIG0170GB

1. Ball seat 2. Bushing 3. Cotter pin

4. Axle housing 5. Back plate 6. Anchor block

7. Wheel hub and bearing assembly 8. Wheel hub lock nut

A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to RAX-8, "Removal and Installation".


JPDIG0178GB

1. Ball seat 2. Bushing 3. Cotter pin

4. Axle housing 5. Back plate 6. Anchor block

7. Wheel hub and bearing assembly 8. Spring washer 9. Wheel hub lock nut

10. Adjusting cap



REMOVAL

Wheel Hub and Bearing Assembly

1. Remove tire from vehicle with power tool.2. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to

BR-64, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View" (1 pistontype), BR-68, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View" (2piston type).CAUTION:Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.

3. Remove disc rotor. Refer to BR-65, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE): Removal and Installation" (1 piston type), BR-69, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation" (2 piston type).

4. Remove cotter pin and adjusting cap (if equipped), then loosen wheel hub lock nut with a power tool.5. Put matching mark (A) on drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing

assembly.

6. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearingassembly from drive shaft. Take out the wheel hub lock nut and spring washer (if equipped).CAUTION:• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for counterpart such as joint sub-assem-

bly, and other parts.NOTE:Use a suitable puller, if the wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated evenafter performing the above procedure.

7. Remove cotter pin, then loosen suspension arm mounting nut of axle housing.8. Remove the wheel hub and bearing assembly.

Axle Housing

1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly.2. Remove parking brake shoe and parking brake cable from back plate. Refer to PB-9, "Exploded View".3. Remove mounting nuts in stabilizer side of stabilizer connecting rod with power tool. Refer to RSU-21,

"Exploded View".4. Remove axle side nuts and bolts on radius rod. Refer to RSU-17, "Exploded View".5. Remove coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Exploded View".6. Set suitable jack under axle housing.7. Remove shock absorber mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side) with power tool. Refer to RSU-11,

"Exploded View".8. Remove front lower link nuts and bolts (axle housing side), separate front lower link from axle housing.

Refer to RSU-19, "Exploded View".

A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to RAX-8, "Removal and Installation".


JPDIG0121ZZ



C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

9. Separate suspension arm from axle housing so as not to damage ball joint boot using ball joint remover,and then remove axle housing from the vehicle.CAUTION:• Temporarily tighten nuts to prevent damage to threads and to prevent the ball joint remover from

coming off.• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for counterpart such as joint sub-assem-

bly, and other parts.10. Remove anchor block mounting nuts, and then remove anchor block and back plate from axle housing.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly.

CAUTION:Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.

• Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear-ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.CAUTION:Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assemblyof drive shaft.

• Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut.

Without adjusting cap and spring washer

With adjusting cap and spring washer

CAUTION:• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel

hub lock nut.• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.NOTE:Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less thantorque for avoiding looseness.

• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removingwheel hub and bearing assembly and axle housing.

• When installing the spring washer, face the identification paint mark to the wheel hub and bearing assemblyside. (With adjusting cap and spring washer for wheel hub lock nut)

• When installing the adjusting cap, check that there must be no play. (With adjusting cap and spring washerfor wheel hub lock nut)

• Never reuse cotter pin, wheel hub lock nut, spring washer (if equipped), and bushing.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Wheel Hub and Bearing AssemblyCheck the wheel hub and bearing assembly for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary.

Axle HousingCheck the axle housing for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary.

Ball Joint InspectionCheck for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of suspension arm ball joint. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspec-tion".

Amount paste 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)

JPDIG0122ZZ

: 180 N·m (18.4 kg-m, 133 ft-lb) – 185 N·m (18.8 kg-m, 136 ft-lb)

: 100 N·m (10 kg-m, 74 ft-lb) – 105 N·m (11 kg-m, 77 ft-lb)


INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION• Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE

SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".• Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-3, "PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (pedal

type), PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (lever type).


REAR DRIVE SHAFT

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

REAR DRIVE SHAFT



REMOVAL1. Remove tire from vehicle with power tool.2. Remove cotter pin and adjusting cap (if equipped), then loosen wheel hub lock nut with power tool.3. Put matching mark (A) on drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing

assembly.4. Remove main muffler and center muffler. Refer to EX-5,

"Exploded View".5. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the

wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from driveshaft. Take out the wheel hub lock nut and spring washer (ifequipped). CAUTION:• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be

careful not to overextend slide joint.• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for

counterpart such as joint sub-assembly, and other parts.NOTE:Using a suitable puller if the wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated evenafter performing the above procedure.

6. Remove mounting bolts between side flange and drive shaft.

1. Housing 2. Snap ring 3. Ball cage/steel ball/inner race as-sembly

4. Stopper ring 5. Boot band 6. Boot

7. Shaft 8. Circular clip 9. Joint sub-assembly

10. Dust shield

: Wheel side

1: NISSAN genuine grease or an equivalent.

2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)].

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

JPDIG0172GB

JPDIG0121ZZ


REAR DRIVE SHAFT
INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly.

CAUTION:Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.

• Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear-ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)]to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.CAUTION:Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assemblyof drive shaft.

• Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut.

Without adjusting cap and spring washer

With adjusting cap and spring washer

CAUTION:• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel

hub lock nut.• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.NOTE:Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less thantorque for avoiding looseness.

• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removingwheel hub and bearing assembly and axle housing.

• When installing the spring washer, face the identification paint mark to the wheel hub and bearing assemblyside. (With adjusting cap and spring washer for wheel hub lock nut)

• When installing the adjusting cap, check that there must be no play. (With adjusting cap and spring washerfor wheel hub lock nut)

• Never reuse cotter pin, wheel hub lock nut, and spring washer (if equipped).


DISASSEMBLY

Rear Final Drive Side

1. Fix shaft with a vise.CAUTION:Protect shaft when fixing with a vise using aluminum or copper plates.

2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing.3. Put matching marks on housing and shaft.

CAUTION:Use paint or similar substance for matching marks. Never scratch the surface.

Amount paste 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)

JPDIG0122ZZ

: 180 N·m (18.4 kg-m, 133 ft-lb) – 185 N·m (18.8 kg-m, 136 ft-lb)

: 100 N·m (10 kg-m, 74 ft-lb) – 105 N·m (11 kg-m, 77 ft-lb)


REAR DRIVE SHAFT

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

4. Remove stopper ring with suitable tool, and pull out housing.

5. Put matching marks on ball cage/steel ball/inner race assembly and shaft.CAUTION:Use paint or similar substance for matching marks. Never scratch the surface.

6. Remove snap ring, then remove ball cage/steel ball/inner raceassembly from shaft.

7. Remove boot from shaft.

Wheel Side

1. Remove dust shield from drive shaft.2. Fix shaft with a vise.

CAUTION:Protect shaft when fixing with a vise using aluminum or copper plates.

3. Remove boot bands. Then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.4. Screw the drive shaft puller (A) 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into the

thread of joint sub-assembly, and pull joint sub-assembly with asliding hammer (B) from shaft.CAUTION:• If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or

more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint subassembly as a set.

• Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them bypulling directory.

5. Remove circular clip from shaft.6. Remove boot from shaft.

ASSEMBLY

Rear Final Drive Side

1. Remove old grease on housing with paper paste.2. Install new boot and boot band to shaft.

CAUTION:• Wrap serrated part of shaft with tape to protect from damage.• Never reuse boot and boot band.

3. Remove the tape wrapped around the serrated on shaft.

SRA249A

SFA514A

JPDIF0015ZZ


REAR DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >4. Install ball cage/steel ball/inner race assembly (1) to shaft (2),
and secure them tightly with a snap ring (3).CAUTION:Never reuse snap ring.NOTE:Align matching marks painted when ball cage/steel ball/innerrace assembly were removed.

5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease onto housing and slidsurface.NOTE:Align matching marks painted when housing were removed.

6. Install stopper ring to housing.7. After installed, pull shaft to check engagement between housing and stopper ring.8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown

in the figure.CAUTION:If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by“*” marks) of shaft or housing, boot may come off. Removeall grease from the surfaces.

9. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa-tion length (L) to the value shown below by inserting the suitabletool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of bootand discharging inside air.

CAUTION:• If the boot installation length is outside the standard, it may cause breakage of boot.• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool.

10. Install new boot bands securely.CAUTION:Never reuse boot band.

a. For one-touch clamp bandi. Secure large and small ends of boot with new boot bands as

shown in the figure.

b. For low profile type band

StandardGrease amount : Refer to RAX-17, "Drive

Shaft".

StandardBoots installed length (L)

: Refer to RAX-17, "Drive Shaft".

JPDIG0004ZZ

JPDIF0223ZZ

PDIA1188J


REAR DRIVE SHAFT

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R

i. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls( ) into holes to temporary installation.NOTE:For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) atfirst.

ii. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band.iii. Insert tip of band below end of the pawl.

11. Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot.Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect.

Wheel Side

1. Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste.2. Apply the specified amount of grease into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to ooze

from ball groove and serration hole.CAUTION:After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old grease that has oozed out.

3. Install new boot and boot band to shaft.CAUTION:• Wrap serrated part of shaft with tape to protect from damage.• Never reuse boot and boot band.

4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serrated on shaft.5. Position circular clip on groove at the shaft edge.

CAUTION:Never reuse circular clip.NOTE:Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip.

6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly. Then assemble shaft with circular clipjoint sub-assembly.

7. Install joint sub-assembly to shaft using plastic hammer.CAUTION:Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged whilerotating drive shaft.

8. Apply the balance of the specified amount of grease into theboot inside from large diameter side of boot.

SDIA3557E

SDIA3558E

StandardGrease amount : Refer to RAX-17, "Drive

Shaft".RAC0049D


REAR DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
shown in the figure.CAUTION:If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (with “*”mark) on the shaft or housing, boot may come off. Removeall grease from the surfaces.

10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa-tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by insertingthe suitable tool into inside of the boot from the large diameterside of boot and discharging the inside air.

CAUTION:• If the boot installation length is outside the standard, it may cause breakage of boot.• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool.

11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bandsusing the boot band crimping tool (A) [SST: KV40107300 ( −

)].

NOTE:Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specificationas shown in the figure.

12. Secure joint sub-assembly and shaft, and then make sure thatthey are in the correct position when rotating boot. Install themwith boot band when boot installation positions become incor-rect.

13. Install dust shield to drive shaft.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in the axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant loose-

ness.• Check boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leak-

age.• If a malfunction is found, disassemble drive shaft, and then replace

with new one.

StandardBoots installed length (L)

: Refer to RAX-17, "Drive Shaft".

JPDIF0222ZZ

PDIA1187J

Dimension “M” : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in)

DSF0047D

RAA0030D


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

C

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

AX

N

O

P


R


Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000004670168

Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000004670169

Item Standard

Axial end play 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less

Item Standard

Joint Wheel side Final drive side

Grease quantity 110 – 120 g (3.38 – 4.23 oz) 124 – 134 g (4.37 – 4.73 oz)

Boots installed length 150.68 mm (5.93 in) 155 mm (6.10 in)


BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

C

D

E

SECTION RFA

B

ROOF

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

F

N

O

P

CONTENTS

R


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 3WorkFlow ..................................................................3





SUNROOF SYSTEM ........................................... 5System Diagram .......................................................5System Description ...................................................5Component Parts Location ......................................6Component Description ............................................6

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 7

COMMON ITEM ...........................................................7COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) .......................................................7

RETAIND PWR ............................................................8RETAIND PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) .....................................................8


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 9

BCM .............................................................................9BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ......................................9

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ................................9SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure ................................................9

SUNROOF SWITCH ...........................................11

Description ...............................................................11Component Function Check ..................................11Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................11Component Inspection .............................................12

DOOR SWITCH .................................................13Description ...............................................................13Component Function Check ..................................13Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................13Component Inspection .............................................14


BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................15Reference Value ......................................................15Wiring Diagram - BCM - ..........................................38Fail-safe ...................................................................43DTC Inspection Priority Chart ...............................45DTC Index ...............................................................47

SUNROOF SYSTEM .........................................50

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ..............................50SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Reference Val-ue .............................................................................50SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Wiring Dia-gram - SUNROOF CONTROL SYSTEM - ...............51

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ..............................55

SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPER-LY ......................................................................55


AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ....56Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................56

DOES NOT STOP FULLY-OPEN OR FULLY-CLOSED POSITION ..........................................57


RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY .....................................58

RF-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58

SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION ............................................. 59

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-NOSES ............................................................... 60

Work Flow ............................................................... 60Inspection Procedure .............................................. 62Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 64

PRECAUTION ............................................. 66

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 66Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ................................................................. 66Service Notice ........................................................ 66Precaution for Work ................................................ 66

PREPARATION ........................................... 68

PREPARATION ................................................. 68Special Service Tool ............................................... 68Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 68

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 69

SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY ........................... 69Exploded View ........................................................ 69Removal and Installation ......................................... 70Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 71

GLASS LID ........................................................ 72Exploded View ........................................................ 72Removal and Installation ......................................... 73Adjustment .............................................................. 73

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...................... 75Exploded View ........................................................ 75Removal and Installation ......................................... 76

SUNSHADE ....................................................... 77Exploded View ........................................................ 77Removal and Installation ......................................... 77


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

WorkFlow INFOID:0000000004249801

DETAILED FLOW



>> GO TO 2.



>> GO TO 3.



>> GO TO 4.



>> GO TO 5.



>> GO TO 6.

6.FINAL CHECK



INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT


MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE1. Please observe the following instructions at confirming the sunroof operation.

NOTE:Do not disconnect the electronic power while the sunroof is operating or within 5 seconds after the sunroofstops (to wipe-out the memory of lid position and operating friction.)

2. Initialization of system should be conducted after the following conditions.• When the sunroof motor is changed.• When the sunroof does not operate normally. (Incomplete initialization conditions)


INITIALIZATION PROCEDUREIf the sunroof does not close or open automatically, use the following procedure to return sunroof operation tonormal.1. Press the tilt up switch and start the tilt up operation.2. Release the tilt up switch once, press the tilt up switch again, press and hold the switch until lid pops up.3. The glass lid will more toward tilt up direction and will be stopped mechanically, and then it will be auto-

matically fully closed. (press and hold the switch during this operation)4. Release the switch again, and press the tilt up switch within the first 10 seconds. (press and hold the

switch)5. After 4 seconds, the glass lid will be automatically operated in sequence of tilt down, slide open and slide

close.6. After the glass lid stops, release the switch 0.5 second later. (press and hold the switch during this opera-

tion)7. If slide switch operates normally, this initialization is done.

ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION1. Full open the sunroof.2. Place a piece of wood near fully closed position.3. Close the sunroof completely with auto-slide close.Check that sunroof lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.91in) with out pinching a piece of wood and stops.CAUTION:• Do not check with hands and other part of body because they may be pinched. Do not get pinched.• Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or lord is applied to the sun-

roof it may lower.• Check that auto-slide operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.• Perform initial setting when auto-slide operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.


SUNROOF SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONSUNROOF SYSTEM


SUNROOF


SUNROOF OPERATION• Sunroof motor assembly operates with the power supply that is output from BCM while ignition switch is ON

or retained power is operating.• Tilt up/down & slide open/close signals from sunroof switch enables operate sunroof motor to move arbi-

trarily.• Sunroof motor assembly receives a vehicle speed signal from unified meter and A/C amp. and controls the

sunroof motor torque of tilt-down at the time of high speed operation.

AUTO OPERATIONSunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to slide open and slide close or tilt up and tilt down the sunroof with-out holding the sunroof switch in the slide open/tilt down or slide close/tilt up position.

RETAINED POWER OPERATION • Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables sunroof system to operate for

45 seconds period of time even when ignition switch is turned OFF.

Retained power function cancel conditions• Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF)→OPEN (door switch ON).• When ignition switch is ON again.• When timer time passes. (45 seconds)

ANTI-PINCH FUNCTIONThe CPU of sunroof motor assembly monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed or other) by the signals from sunroof motor.When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following slide close and tilt down operation, sunroofswitch controls the motor for open. And then the sunroof will operate until full up position (when tilt down oper-ate) or 150 mm (5.91 in) or more in an open direction (when slide close operate):• close operation and tilt down when ignition switch is in the “ON” position

JMKIA1208GB


SUNROOF SYSTEM


1. BCM M118,M119,M123 2. Sunroof motor assembly R4 3. Unified meter and A/C amp. M66

4. Sunroof switch R16 5. Driver side door switch B16

A. View with dash side finisher RH re-moved

B. View with headlining removed C. Behind cluster lid C

JMKIA1123ZZ

Component Function

BCM• Supplies the power supply to sunroof motor assembly.• Controls retained power.

Sunroof switch Transmits tilt up/down & slides open/close operation signal to sunroof motor assembly.

Sunroof motor assemblyIt is sunroof motor and CPU integrated type that enables tilt up/down & slide open/close by sun-roof switch operation.

Door switch Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM.

Unified meter and A/C amp. Transmits vehicle speed signal to sunroof motor assembly.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R





×: Applicable item


FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) AND IGN COUNTER

Freeze Frame DataThe BCM records the following condition at the moment a particular DTC is detected.• Vehicle Speed• Odo/Trip Meter


















— AIR CONDITONER* ×

Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×





Trunk open TRUNK ×


RAP system RETAINED PWR ×




< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• Vehicle Condition (BCM detected condition)
IGN CounterIGN counter indicates the number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected.• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition

switch OFF → ON.• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.RETAIND PWR

RETAIND PWR : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000004249809

Data monitor

CONSULT screen terms Description

SLEEP>LOCKWhile turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)





CRANK>RUNWhile turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From cranking up the en-gine to run it)

RUN>URGENT While turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emergency stop operation)





OFF>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCK>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”.) to low pow-er consumption mode

LOCK Power supply position is “LOCK” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is locked.)

OFF Power supply position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.)


ON Power supply position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)

ENGINE RUN Power supply position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)


Monitor Item Description

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISPOWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITBCM








Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the harness or connector.



Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair the harness or connector.

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004249811


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector.3. Turn ignition switch ON.4. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.



K (40 A)

11 10 (10 A)

(+)


BCM

Connector Terminal


M119 11

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 13 Existed



2.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and sunroof motor assembly harness connector.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Repair or replace the harness.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the harness.



>> INSPECTION END

(+)


Sunroof motor assembly

Connector Terminal

R47


BCM Sunroof motor assemblyContinuity


M1182

R47

Existed3 9

BCM

Ground


M1182

Not existed3


GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

R4 10 Existed


SUNROOF SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SUNROOF SWITCH


• Sunroof motor assembly is sunroof motor and CPU integrated type.• Tilts up/down & slides open/close by sunroof switch operation.• In order to close sunroof lid certainly with the signal from unified meter and A/C amp. at the time of high

speed run, the sunroof motor torque at the time of tilt-down operation is controlled.


1.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR FUNCTION

Check tilt up/down & slide open/close operations with sunroof switch.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Sunroof motor function is OK.NO >> Refer to RF-11, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.


2.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector and sunroof switch connector.3. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly harness connector and sunroof switch harness con-

nector.

4. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.


(+)



Connector Terminal

R4

5

Ground

Sunroof switch is operatedTILT DOWN or SLIDE OPEN

0


1

Sunroof switch is operated TILT UP or SLIDE CLOSE

0


Sunroof motor assembly Sunroof switchContinuity


R45

R161

Existed1 3


Ground


R45

Not existed1


SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> Repair or the replace harness.
3.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between sunroof switch harness connector and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Refer to RF-12, "Component Inspection".NO >> Repair or replace the harness.



>> INSPECTION END


SUNROOF SWITCH

1.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect sunroof switch connector.3. Check continuity sunroof switch terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace sunroof switch (built in map lamp assembly).

Sunroof switch

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

R16 2 Existed

Terminal Condition Continuity

1

2

Sunroof switch is operated TILT DOWN or SLIDE OPEN

Existed


3

Sunroof switch is operatedTILT UP or SLIDE CLOSE

Existed



DOOR SWITCH

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

DOOR SWITCH


Detects door open/close condition.


1.CHECK FUNCTION

With CONSULT-IIICheck door switches (“DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”) in Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Door switch is OK.NO >> Refer to RF-13, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.


2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect BCM connector and door switch connector.2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and door switch harness connector.


DOOR SW-DRCLOSE → OPEN: OFF → ON

DOOR SW-AS

(+)

(–) Door conditionVoltage (V)(Approx.)

BCM

Connector Terminal

M123

150

Ground

Driver side

OPEN 0

CLOSE

124 Passenger side

OPEN 0

CLOSE

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0011GB


DOOR SWITCH

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and door switch.

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Refer to RF-14, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. Refer to DLK-237, "Removal and Installation".



>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect door switch connector.3. Check continuity between door switch terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. Refer to DLK-237, "Removal and Installation".

BCM Door switchContinuity


M123150 B16 (Driver side)

2 Existed124 B216 (Passenger side)

BCM

Ground


M123150

Not existed124

TerminalDoor switch condition Continuity

Door switch

2 Ground part of door switchPressed Not existed

Released Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

















position




















Off






Off



Off


Off










Off




Off


Off






Trunk lid opened On











RKE-MODE CHG


Off









Off




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R


Off








Off



BRAKE SW 1



On



DETE/CANCL SW


Off


On

















SFT PN -IPDM


Off


On







ENGINE STATE

Engine stopped Stop



Engine running Run





S/L RELAY-REQ


Off


On


ometer reading


ometer reading

DOOR STAT-DR




DOOR STAT-AS









Reset




the Intelligent Key


—

CONFRM ID ALL


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID4


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID3


Yet


Done




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

CONFIRM ID2


Yet


Done

CONFIRM ID1


Yet


Done










tire


tire


tire


tire















TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JPMIA0062ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R


Description

ConditionValue


1(W)


2(Y)



3(O)



4(LG)


Output


0 V


12 V

5(P)




12 V


0 V

7(SB)


OFF 12 V

8(V)




12 V


0 V

9(G)




12 V


0 V

11(R)


13(B)


14(W)


Output Tail lamp

OFF 0 V

ON



15(O)



Battery voltage

ACC 0 V

JSNIA0010GB


17(W)





6.5 V

18(O)




6.5 V

19(V)



OFF 12 V

ON 0 V

20(V)




6.5 V

23(L)



12 V


0 V

25(Y)




6.5 V

30(P)


ON 0 V

OFF 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

34(SB)





35(V)





38(B)


Output





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


39(W)


Output




47(Y)



ON 0 V

50(R)




11.8 V


52(SB)




12 V


0 V



Battery voltage


0 V

61(SB)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

64(L)



Sounding 0 V

Not sounding 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

67(GR)



Pressed 0 V

Not pressed

11.8 V

72(R)





73(G)






Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


74(SB)


Output




75(BR)


Output




76(V)


Output





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

77(LG)


Output




78(Y)





79(BR)






Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


80(GR)


Input/Output



move.

81(W)


Input/Output



move.

82(R)



ON 12 V

83(Y)


Input/Output

During waiting


87(Y)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0064GB

JMKIA0065GB

JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

88(O)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

89(BR)



Pressed 0 V


90(P)


— —

91(L)


— —

92(LG)


OFF 0 V

Blinking

6.5 V

ON 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0015GB


93(Y)



Battery voltage

ON 0 V

95(O)


ACC or ON 12 V

96(GR)


Output — 12 V

97(L)



UNLOCK status 12 V

98(P)



UNLOCK status 0 V

99(R)

Ground


Input




ASCD clutch switch


0 V


12 V


ICC clutch switch


0 V


12 V

100(Y)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

101(P)



ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

102(O)



ON 12 V

103(LG)



106(W)



ON 0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0016GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

107(LG)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0039GB


108(R)




1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0039GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

109(W)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND

1.3 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

110(G)


ON 0 V

OFF

1.1 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0012GB


111(Y)


Input/Output

Steering lock

LOCK status 12 V

LOCK or UNLOCK


12 V


0 V

113(O)



Close to 5 V


Close to 0 V

114(R)




0 V


Battery voltage

116(SB)


118(BR)

Ground


Input

Stop lamp switch


0 V


Battery voltage



0 V


Battery voltage

119(SB)


Input Driver door


1.1 V


0 V

121(SB)



12 V


0 V

123(W)


ON Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0066GB

JPMIA0012GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

124(LG)



OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

129(O)



CANCEL

1.1 V

ON 0 V

132(V)


Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

10.2 V


133(L)




ON (Tail lamps ON)



OFF 0 V

134(LG)


OFF Battery voltage

ON 0 V

137(O)



138(V)



ACC or ON 5.0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0012GB

JPMIA0013GB

JPMIA0159GB


139(L)


Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

Standby state


140(GR)




141(R)


ON 0 V

Blinking

11.3 V

OFF 12 V

142(BR)


Output



Lighting switch 1ST

10.7 V

Lighting switch HI

Lighting switch 2ND


143(V)




0 V


10.7 V



Description

ConditionValue


OCC3881D

OCC3880D

JPMIA0014GB

JPMIA0031GB

JPMIA0032GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

144(G)




0 V


10.7 V


145(L)


Output




10.7 V



146(SB)


Output




10.7 V

Lighting switch 2ND



149(W)


Input — 12 V

150(R)


OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

151(G)



Active 0 V



Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0033GB

JPMIA0034GB

JPMIA0035GB

JPMIA0011GB



JCMWM3046GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

JCMWM3047GB


JCMWM3048GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

JCMWM3049GB


JCMWM3050GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R



JCMWM3051GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R



























Priority DTC



3


4




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R


NOTE:The details of time display are as follows.• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-14, "COM-MON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".

5



Priority DTC






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


— — — — —

U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-35











B2555: STOP LAMP — × — — SEC-59









B2604: PNP SW × × × — SEC-73

B2605: PNP SW × × × — SEC-75

B2606: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-77

B2607: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-78


B2609: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-82






B2612: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-94





B2618: BCM × × × — PCS-58

B2619: BCM × × × — SEC-100



— SEC-101






— SEC-92


— SEC-93










lamp ON

Refer-ence page



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — ×

WT-19C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — ×

C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — ×

C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — ×









C1720: [CODE ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-26C1721: [CODE ERR] FR — — — ×

C1722: [CODE ERR] RR — — — ×

C1723: [CODE ERR] RL — — — ×












lamp ON

Refer-ence page


SUNROOF SYSTEM
SUNROOF SYSTEMSUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Reference Value INFOID:0000000004249825

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JMKIA0131ZZ


Description



1(GR)

GroundSunroof close switch (BIT 1) signal

Input

Sunroof switch in following position• TILT UP• SLIDE CLOSE

0


5(P)

GroundSunroof open switch (BIT 0) signal

Input

Sunroof switch in following position• TILT DOWN• SLIDE OPEN

0


7(W)

Ground Sunroof power supply Input — Battery voltage

8(L)

GroundVehicle speed signal (2-pulse)

InputSpeedometer operated [When vehi-cle speed is approx.40km/ h (25MPH)]

9(Y)

Ground Retained power signal Input


Within 45 second after ignition switch is turned to OFF.

Battery voltage

When driver side or passenger side door is opened during retained power operation.

0

10(B)


ELF1080D


SUNROOF SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Wiring Diagram - SUNROOF CONTROL SYSTEM -INFOID:0000000004249826

JCKWM2149GB


SUNROOF SYSTEM
JCKWM2150GB


SUNROOF SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

JCKWM2151GB


SUNROOF SYSTEM
JCKWM2152GB


SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISSUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY


1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to RF-9, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit.Refer to RF-9, "SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure"Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH

Check sunroof switch.Refer to RF-11, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE



Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.Refer to RF-4, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 2.




DOES NOT STOP FULLY-OPEN OR FULLY-CLOSED POSITION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

DOES NOT STOP FULLY-OPEN OR FULLY-CLOSED POSITION



Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.Refer to RF-4, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 2.




RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY


1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch. Refer to RF-13, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.




SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION



Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed. Refer to RF-4, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION END.NO >> GO TO 2.






CUSTOMER INTERVIEWInterview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any ofcustomer's comments; refer to RF-64, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate theconditions that exist when the noise occurs.• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain

all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is

concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics

are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language whendefining the noise.

• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping

• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-dent on materials/often brought on by activity.

• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missingclip or fastener/incorrect clearance.

• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.

• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driveraction or road conditions.

• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.

• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.

• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that a technicianmay judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.

• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVEIf possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information onthe Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used toduplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.

SBT842



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:1) Close a door.2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.3) Rev the engine.4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the

vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINSAfter verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relatedto that concern or symptom.If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool

(Chassis ear: J-39570, Engine ear and mechanics stethoscope).2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.

Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be brokenor lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.

• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-porarily.

• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of thenoise.

• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.• Looking for loose components and contact marks.

Refer to RF-62, "Inspection Procedure".

REPAIR THE CAUSE• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-

thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized Nissan PartsDepartment.

CAUTION:Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.NOTE:Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can beordered separately as needed.URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]Insulates connectors, harness, etc.76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)INSULATOR (Foam blocks)Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)INSULATOR (Light foam block)80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)FELT CLOTHTAPEUsed to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape rollThe following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE


< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.SILICONE GREASEUsed in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. Will only last a few months.SILICONE SPRAYUsed when grease cannot be applied.DUCT TAPEUsed to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIRConfirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the sameconditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004684711

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.

INSTRUMENT PANELMost incidents are caused by contact and movement between:1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish4. Instrument panel to windshield5. Instrument panel mounting pins6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint

These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or bypressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired byapplying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulatewiring harness.CAUTION:Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, therecheck of repair becomes impossible.

CENTER CONSOLEComponents to pay attention to include:1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unitThe instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORSPay attention to the following:1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher3. Wiring harnesses tapping4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stopsTapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolatemany of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks fromthe Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.

TRUNKTrunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.In addition look for the following:1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together4. A loose license plate or bracket



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-ing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLININGNoises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeakingAgain, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of theseincidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

SEATSWhen isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seats in and the load placed on the seat whenthe noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise.Cause of seat noise include:1. Headrest rods and holder2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame3. The rear seatback lock and bracketThese noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-ditions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the componentor applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOODSome interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is thentransmitted into the passenger compartment.Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:1. Any component mounted to the engine wall2. Components that pass through the engine wall3. Engine wall mounts and connectors4. Loose radiator mounting pins5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment6. Hood striker out of adjustmentThese noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The bestmethod is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPMor load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, orinsulating the component causing the noise.


Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000004249834

PIIB8741E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

PIIB8742E


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >









Service Notice INFOID:0000000004249836

• When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding onto the vehicle body to preventscratches.

• Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to oil ordamage them.

• Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts.• When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts.• When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust preven-

tion measures.

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000004249837

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a componentmay be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.

• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the componentwith a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.

• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them.• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.• After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally.• Follow the steps below to clean components.- Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the

fouled area.Then rub with a soft and dry cloth.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

R

- Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipethe fouled area.Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub witha soft and dry cloth.

• Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, and gasoline.• For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >




Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)

Tool nameDescription

(J39570)Chassis ear

Locates the noise

(J43980)NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairs the cause of noise

SIIA0993E

SIIA0994E


Engine ear Locates the noise

SIIA0995E


SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONSUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY


REMOVAL

1. Drain hose 2. Side trim 3. TORX bolt

4. Glass lid 5. TORX bolt 6. Sunroof motor assembly

7. Front sunroof bracket (LH/RH) 8. Rear sunroof bracket (LH/RH) 9. Sunroof unit assembly

10. Drain connector

JMKIA1266ZZ


DISASSEMBLY


REMOVALCAUTION:• Always work with a helper.• Fully close the glass lid assembly, before removal, then never operate sunroof motor assembly after

removal.

1. Sunshade stopper 2. Rear drain assembly 3. Sunshade

4. Wind deflector 5. Sunroof frame

JMKIA1267ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

• When taking sunroof unit out, use cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.• After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, perform the leak test and check that there is no mal-

function.1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation". 2. Disconnect drain hoses.3. Remove the glass lid. Refer to RF-73, "Removal and Installation".4. Remove sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-76, "Removal and Installation".5. Remove assistance grip bracket.6. Remove sunroof bracket bolts and nuts.7. Remove nuts from the front end and side rail, and then remove sunroof unit assembly from roof panel.8. Remove sunroof unit assembly through the passenger compartment while being careful not to damage

the seats and trim.

INSTALLATION1. Bring sunroof unit assembly into passenger compartment.2. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the side rail of sunroof unit assembly.3. Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the front end of sunroof unit assembly.4. Tighten the installation points diagonally excluding the installation point of the sunroof bracket around the

roof opening.5. Tighten the sunroof bracket bolts of the vehicle side, and then tighten the bolt of the rail side.6. Tighten the mounting nuts to the front end and side rail.7. Install the assistance grip bracket.8. Install the sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-76, "Removal and Installation".9. Install the glass lid. Refer to RF-73, "Removal and Installation".10. Install the side trim.11. Connect drain hoses.12. Install the headlining. Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".


DISASSEMBLY1. Remove sunshade stopper mounting from the rear end of sunroof frame.2. Remove rear drain assembly from sunroof frame.3. Remove sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame.4. Remove wind deflector from sunroof frame.

ASSEMBLYAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.


GLASS LID
GLASS LID





10. Drain connector

JMKIA1266ZZ


GLASS LID

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R


REMOVAL1. Remove the side trim.2. Remove the TORX bolts (A) and remove glass lid.

INSTALLATIONCAUTION:After installing the glass lid, peform the leak test and check thet there is no malfunction.NOTE:After installation carry out fitting adjustment. Refer to RF-73, "Adjustment".Install in the reverse order of removal.

Adjustment INFOID:0000000004249845

Lid Weatherstrip Overlap Adjustment and Surface Mismatch Adjustment1. Tilt up glass lid, and then remove side trim.2. After loosening glass lid from TORX bolts (left and right), tilt down glass lid.3. Adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so it resembles “A – A”“B – B” "C – C" as shown in the figure.

4. To prevent glass lid from moving after adjustment, first tighten the TORX bolts of front left, and thentighten the TORX bolts of rear right.

5. Tighten remaining TORX bolts, being careful to prevent glass lid from moving.6. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly.NOTE:

JMKIA0029ZZ

PIIB3117J

a bA – A 0.6 - 2.2 mm (0.024 - 0.087 in) -2.3 - 0.7 mm (-0.091 - 0.028 in)B – B 0.6 - 2.2 mm (0.024 - 0.087 in) -2.3 - 0.7 mm (-0.091 - 0.028 in)C – C 0.6 - 2.2 mm (0.024 - 0.087 in) -2.3 - 0.7 mm (-0.091 - 0.028 in)


GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >After adjustment the sunroof unit assembly, perform additional service. Refer to RF-4, "ADDITIONAL SER-VICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description".


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R






10. Drain connector

JMKIA1266ZZ



REMOVALCAUTION:• Before removing sunroof motor, check that glass lid is fully closed.• After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit.1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".2. Remove sunroof motor assembly mounting screws (A).

Disconnect connector (B) from sunroof motor assembly andthen remove sunroof motor assembly (1).

INSTALLATIONCAUTION:Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to the place the link and wire assembly in thesymmetrical and fully closed position.1. Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on

the sunroof unit assembly and mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the sunroof motorassembly with screw.

2. Install the headlining. Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".

JMKIA0222ZZ


SUNSHADE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

L

M

A

B

F

N

O

P


R

SUNSHADE



REMOVAL1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".

1. Sunshade stopper 2. Rear drain assembly 3. Sunshade

4. Wind deflector 5. Sunroof frame

JMKIA1267ZZ


SUNSHADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >2. Remove the sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-70, "Removal and Installation".3. Remove the sunshade stopper mounting from the rear end of sunroof frame.4. Remove the sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame.


SUSPENSION

C

D

SECTION RSUA

B

SU
R
REAR SUSPENSION

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONTENTS

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ......................................2

PRECAUTION ............................................... 3

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3Precautions for Suspension ......................................3

PREPARATION ............................................ 4

PREPARATION ................................................... 4Special Service Tool .................................................4Commercial Service Tool ..........................................4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5

REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5Inspection and Adjustment ........................................5

WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6Inspection ..................................................................6


REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING ............... 8Exploded View ..........................................................8Removal and Installation ...........................................9Inspection ..................................................................9

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ..............................11Exploded View ........................................................11Removal and Installation .........................................12Disassembly and Assembly ....................................12Inspection ................................................................12

SUSPENSION ARM ..........................................14Exploded View .........................................................14Removal and Installation .........................................15Inspection ................................................................15

RADIUS ROD ....................................................17Exploded View .........................................................17Removal and Installation .........................................18Inspection ................................................................18

FRONT LOWER LINK .......................................19Exploded View .........................................................19Removal and Installation .........................................20Inspection ................................................................20

REAR STABILIZER ..........................................21Exploded View .........................................................21Removal and Installation .........................................22Inspection ................................................................22

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ......23

REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER .......................23Exploded View .........................................................23Removal and Installation .........................................24Inspection ................................................................25

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................26

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................26

Wheel Alignment .....................................................26Ball Joint ..................................................................26Wheelarch Height ....................................................26

RSU-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISNOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000004670316

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

×: Applicable

Reference page

RS

U-8

, RS

U-1

1, R

SU

-14,

RS

U-1

7, R

SU

-19,

RS

U-2

1

RS

U-1

2

— — —

RS

U-8

, RS

U-1

1, R

SU

-14,

RS

U-1

7, R

SU

-19,

RS

U-2

1

RS

U-6

RS

U-2

2

NV

H in

DLN

sec

tion.

NV

H in

DLN

sec

tion.

NV

H in

RA

X a

nd R

SU

sec

tions

.

NV

H in

WT

sec

tion.

NV

H in

WT

sec

tion.

NV

H in

RA

X s

ectio

n.

NV

H in

BR

sec

tion.

NV

H in

ST

sec

tion.

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Impr

oper

inst

alla

tion,

loos

enes

s

Sho

ck a

bsor

ber

defo

rmat

ion,

dam

age

or d

efle

ctio

n

Bus

hing

or

mou

ntin

g de

terio

ratio

n

Par

ts in

terf

eren

ce

Spr

ing

fatig

ue

Sus

pens

ion

loos

enes

s

Inco

rrec

t whe

el a

lignm

ent

Sta

biliz

er b

ar fa

tigue

PR

OP

ELL

ER

SH

AF

T

DIF

FE

RE

NT

IAL

RE

AR

AX

LE A

ND

RE

AR

SU

SP

EN

SIO

N

TIR

E

RO

AD

WH

EE

L

DR

IVE

SH

AF

T

BR

AK

E

ST

EE

RIN

G

Symptom REAR SUSPENSION

Noise × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×

Shake × × × × × × × × × × × ×

Vibration × × × × × × × × × ×

Shimmy × × × × × × × × × ×

Judder × × × × × × × ×

Poor quality ride or handling

× × × × × × × × × ×


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

R


Precautions for Suspension INFOID:0000000004670317

• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tireson ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.

- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools andmats are in designated positions.

• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,

tighten as they are.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >




Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

ST3127S000(J-25765-A)Preload gauge

Measuring rotating torque of ball joint

ZZA0806D


Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E


REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

PERIODIC MAINTENANCEREAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004670320

MOUNTING INSPECTIONMake sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions(wear, damage) are normal.

BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAYMeasure axial end play by placing and moving up/down with an iron bar or equivalent between suspensionarm and axle assembly.

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.

SHOCK ABSORBERCheck for oil leakage, damage and replace if malfunction is detected.

StandardAxial end play : Refer to RSU-26, "Ball Joint".


WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WHEEL ALIGNMENT


DESCRIPTION• Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions. NOTE:“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools andmats are in designated positions.

GENENRAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS• A four-wheel thrust alignment should be performed.- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.- The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is

centered.- The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.- The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level.• Make sure the machine is properly calibrated.- Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.- Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended Service/Calibration Sched-

ule.

ALIGNMENT PROCESSIMPORTANT:Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual.• When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or

minus, Go/No Go). Never use these indicators.- The alignment specifications programmed into your machine that operate these indicators may not be cor-

rect.- This may result in an ERROR.• Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional “Rolling Compensation” method to “com-

pensate” the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Never use this “Rolling Compensation” method.- Use the “Jacking Compensation Method”. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehi-

cle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.- See Instructions in the alignment machine you're using for more information on this.

PRELIMINARY CHECKCheck the following:• Tires for improper air pressure and wear.• Road wheels for runout. Refer to WT-95, "Inspection".• Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to RAX-5, "Inspection".• Ball joint axial end play of suspension arm. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspection".• Shock absorber operation.• Each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation.• Each of front lower link, rear lower link, radius rod, rear suspension member, suspension arm and shock

absorber for cracks, deformation, and other damage.• Vehicle height (posture).

ADJUSTMENT

Camber• If outside the standard value, adjust with adjusting bolt (1) in front

lower link (2).

CAUTION:After adjusting camber, be sure to check toe-in.

- If camber is not still within the specification, inspect and replaceany damaged or worn suspension parts.

StandardCamber: Refer to RSU-26, "Wheel Alignment".

JPEIB0061ZZ


WHEEL ALIGNMENT

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

Toe-In• If toe-in is not within the specification, adjust with adjusting bolt (1)

in rear lower link (2).

CAUTION:Be sure to adjust equally on RH and LH side with adjustingbolt.

- If toe-in is not still within the specification, inspect and replace anydamaged or worn suspension parts.

StandardToe-In: Refer to RSU-26, "Wheel Alignment".

JPEIB0062ZZ


REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONREAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING


JPEIB0155GB



C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


RRemoval and Installation INFOID:0000000004670323

REMOVAL1. Remove tires with power tool.2. Set suitable jack under rear lower link to relieve the coil spring tension.3. Loosen rear lower link mounting bolts and nuts (rear suspension member side), and then remove rear

lower link mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side) with power tool.4. Slowly lower jack, then remove upper seat, coil spring and rubber sheet from rear lower link.5. Remove rear lower link mounting bolts and nuts (rear suspension member side) to remove rear lower link

with power tool.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Make sure that upper seat is attached as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:Make sure that the projecting parts (A) on upper seat (1)inside is securely fitted on the bracket (2) tabs (B).

• Match up rubber seat indentions and rear lower link grooves andattach.

• Install the coil spring by aligning the lower end of the large diame-ter side to the step (A) between the rubber seat (1) and the rearlower link (2).CAUTION:Make sure spring is not up side down. The top and bottom areindicated by paint color.

• Perform the final tightening of rear suspension member and axleinstallation position (rubber bushing) under unladen condition withtires on level ground.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck rear lower link, bushing and coil spring for deformation, crack, and damage. Replace it if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

1. Suspension arm 2. Stopper rubber 3. Stabilizer connecting rod mounting bracket

4. Stabilizer connecting rod 5. Upper stopper (4WD model) 6. Mount stopper

7. Suspension member 8. Stabilizer bar 9. Stabilizer bushing

10. Stabilizer clamp 11. Upper seat 12. Coil spring

13. Damper assembly (A/T model) 14. Rear lower link 15. Front lower link

16. Radius rod 17. Cotter pin 18. Axle assembly

19. Rubber seat 20. Ball seat 21. Shock absorber

22. Bound bumper cover 23. Shock absorber mounting bracket 24. Mounting seal

25. Piston rod lock nut 26. Cap


: Body

JPEIB0012ZZ

JPEIB0013ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".


REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER




JPEIB0155GB


REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

REMOVAL1. Remove tires with power tool.2. Set suitable jack under axle assembly to relieve the coil spring tension.3. Remove shock absorber (lower side).4. Gradually lower the jack to remove it from rear lower link.5. Remove shock absorber assembly mounting nuts (upper side)

( ) with power tool, and then remove shock absorber assem-bly.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the shock absorber lower side (rubber bushing), under unladen

conditions with tires on level ground.


DISASSEMBLYCAUTION:Never damage shock absorber piston rod when removing components from shock absorber. 1. Remove cap from mounting bracket 2. Wrap a shop cloth around lower side of shock absorber and fix it with a vise.

CAUTION:Never set the cylindrical part of shock absorber with a vise.

3. Secure the piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, and remove piston rod lock nut.4. Remove mounting seal, mounting bracket and bound bumper cover from shock absorber.

ASSEMBLYInstall in the reverse order of removal.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCehck the following items, and replace the part if necessary.• Check shock absorber assembly for deformation, cracks, damage.• Check welded and sealed areas for oil leakage.

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Bound Bumper and Bushing









JPEIB0060ZZ


REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

Check bound bumper cover and bushing for cracks and damage. Replace if necessary.

Shock AbsorberCheck the following, and replace the part if necessary.• Shock absorber for deformation, cracks, and other damage.• Piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion.

INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLYMake sure piston rod on shock absorber is not damaged when attaching components to shock absorber.




SUSPENSION ARM
SUSPENSION ARM




JPEIB0155GB


SUSPENSION ARM

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R


REMOVAL1. Remove tire with power tool.2. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to

BR-64, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View" (front cali-per 1 piston type), BR-68, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) :Exploded View" (front caliper 2 piston type), BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) :Exploded View" (2 piston type).

3. Set suitable jack under axle assembly to relieve the coil spring tension.4. Remove connecting rod mounting bracket from suspension arm with power tool.5. Remove drive shaft. Refer to RAX-11, "Exploded View".6. Remove height sensor. Refer to EXL-202, "Exploded View".7. Remove cotter pin of suspension arm ball joint, and loosen nut. Refer to RSU-14, "Exploded View".8. Remove suspension mounting bolts and nuts (rear suspension member side).9. Use the ball joint remover to remove suspension arm from axle assembly. Be careful not to damage ball

joint boot.CAUTION:Tighten temporarily mounting nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent ball joint removerfrom coming off.

10. Remove suspension arm.

INSTALLATIONNote the following and, install in the reverse order of removal.• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member installation position (rubber bussing), under unladen

conditions with tires on level ground.• Never reuse cotter pin.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

AppearanceCheck the following items, and replace the part if necessary.• Check suspension arm and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.• Check boot of ball joint for cracks or damage, and also for grease leakage.

Ball Joint InspectionManually move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.

Swing Torque Inspection










SUSPENSION ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >• Hook spring balance (A) at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm
spring balance measurement value is within specifications whenball stud begins moving.

- If it is outside the specified range, replace suspension arm assem-bly.

Rotating Torque Inspection• Attach the mounting nut to ball stud. Make sure that rotating torque

is within the specifications with a preload gauge (A)[SST:ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)].

- If it is outside the specified range, replace suspension arm assem-bly.

Axial End Play Inspection• Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness.

- If it is outside the specified range, replace suspension arm assembly.



StandardSwing torque : Refer to RSU-26, "Ball Joint".

JPEIA0005ZZ

StandardRotating torque : Refer to RSU-26, "Ball Joint".

PDIA1258E

StandardAxial end play : Refer to RSU-26, "Ball Joint".


RADIUS ROD

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

RADIUS ROD




JPEIB0155GB


RADIUS ROD

REMOVAL1. Remove tire with power tool.2. Set suitable jack under axle assembly.3. Remove radius rod mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side).4. Remove radius rod mounting bolt (rear suspension member side), and then remove radius rod.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member and axle installation position (rubber bushing), under

unladen conditions with tires on level ground.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck radius rod and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.












FRONT LOWER LINK

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

FRONT LOWER LINK




JPEIB0155GB


FRONT LOWER LINK

REMOVAL1. Remove tire with power tool.2. Set suitable jack under axle assembly to relieve the coil spring tension.3. Remove front lower link mounting bolts and nuts (rear suspension member side).4. Remove front lower link mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side). 5. Remove front lower link.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member and axle installation position (rubber bushing), under

unladen conditions with tires on level ground.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck front lower link and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.












REAR STABILIZER

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

REAR STABILIZER




JPEIB0155GB


REAR STABILIZER

REMOVAL1. Remove mounting bracket of center muffler and remove mounting rubber of main muffler. Refer to EX-5,

"Exploded View".2. Remove stabilizer connecting rod mounting nuts (lower side), and remove stabilizer connecting rod from

stabilizer bar.3. Remove mounting nuts on stabilizer clamp and remove stabilizer bar.

INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Tighten the mounting nut to the specified toqrue while holding a hexagonal part of stabilizer connecting rod

side.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck stabilizer bar, stabilizer connecting rod, stabilizer bushing and stabilizer clamp for deformation, cracksor damage. Replace it if a malfunction is detected.










REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER

C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

R

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONREAR SUSPENSION MEMBER


JPEIB0155GB



REMOVAL1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool.2. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to

BR-64, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View" (front cali-per 1 piston type), BR-68, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) :Exploded View" (front caliper 2 piston type), BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) :Exploded View" (2 piston type).CAUTION:Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.

3. Remove disc rotor. Refer to BR-65, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER 1 PISTON TYPE): Removal and Installation" (front caliper 1 piston type), BR-69, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONTCALIPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation" (front caliper 2 piston type), BR-73, "BRAKE CAL-IPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation" (2 piston type).

4. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness from axle assembly and suspension arm. Refer to BRC-100,"Exploded View".

5. Remove height sensor harness from rear suspension member. Refer to EXL-202, "Exploded View".6. Remove center muffler and main muffler. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".7. Remove stabilizer bar. Refer to RSU-21, "Exploded View".8. Remove drive shaft. Refer to RAX-11, "Exploded View".9. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-90, "Exploded View" (3S80A), DLN-97, "Exploded View" (3S80A-

R), DLN-105, "Exploded View" (3S80A-1VL107).10. Remove harness from rear final drive and rear suspension member.11. Remove final drive. Refer to DLN-245, "M/T : Exploded View" [R200V (M/T)], DLN-247, "A/T : Exploded

View" [R200V (A/T)], DLN-172, "2WD : Exploded View" [R200 (2WD)], DLN-174, "AWD : Exploded View"[R200 (AWD)].

12. Remove parking brake cable mounting bolt and separate parking brake cable from vehicle and rear sus-pension member. Refer to PB-6, "PEDAL TYPE : Exploded View" (pedal type), PB-7, "LEVER TYPE :Exploded View" (lever type).

13. Remove mounting bolts in lower side of shock absorber.14. Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Exploded View". 15. Set suitable jack under rear suspension member.16. Remove mounting nuts rear suspension member.17. Slowly lower jack, then remove rear suspension member, suspension arm, radius rod, front lower link and

axle from vehicle as a unit.18. Remove mounting bolts and nuts, then remove suspension arm, front lower link, and radius rod from rear

suspension member.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.













C

D

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

SU

N

O

P


R

• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removingrear suspension assembly.

• Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-100, "Exploded View". CAUTION:Never reuse cotter pin.


INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALCheck front suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace if necessary.


SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".• Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). PB-3, "PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (pedal type), PB-

4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (lever type).


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000004504373

Measure value under unladen* conditions.

*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.

Ball Joint INFOID:0000000004504374

Wheelarch Height INFOID:0000000004504375

Measure value under unladen* conditions.

*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.

Item Standard

CamberDegree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum –1° 45′ (–1.75°)

Nominal –1° 15′ (–1.25°)

Maximum –0° 45′ (–0.75°)

Total toe-in

Distance

Minimum 0 mm (0 in)

Nominal In 2.8 mm (0.110 in)

Maximum In 5.6 mm (0.220 in)

Angle (left wheel or right wheel)Degree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum 0° 00′ (0.00°)

Nominal In 0° 07′ (0.12°)

Maximum In 0° 14′ (0.23°)

Item Standard

Swing torque 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)

Measurement on spring balance (cotter pinhole position) 8.1 – 54.8 N (0.83 – 5.6 kg, 1.82 – 12.32 lb)

Rotating torque 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)

Axial end play 0 mm (0 in)

Applied model2WD

AWDExcept for sports models For sports models

Wheel size 18 inch 19 inch 18 inch

Front (Hf) 712 mm (28.03 in) 715 mm (28.15 in) 716 mm (28.19 in) 726 mm (28.58 in)

Rear (Hr) 702 mm (27.64 in) 705 mm (27.76 in) 706 mm (27.80 in) 718 mm (28.27 in)

SFA818A


RESTRAINTS

C

D

E

SECTION SBA

B

SEAT BELT

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

O

P

CONTENTS

S

PRECAUTION ............................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...................................................................2Precaution for Battery Service ..................................2Precaution for Seat Belt Service ...............................2


FRONT SEAT BELT ............................................ 4

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ..........................................4SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ....................4SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View .............6SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Instal-lation ..........................................................................6

SEAT BELT BUCKLE .................................................7SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ............................7SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View .....................8

SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation ..... 8

REAR SEAT BELT ............................................. 9

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ......................................... 9SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ................... 9SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View ...........11SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Instal-lation ........................................................................11

SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................11SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................12SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View ...................12SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation ....13

LATCH SYSTEM FOR CHILDREN ...................14Exploded View .........................................................14Removal and Installation .........................................14

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT .....15Exploded View .........................................................15Removal and Installation .........................................15

SB-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >











Precaution for Seat Belt Service INFOID:0000000004258092

CAUTION:• Before removing the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect

both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.• Do not use electrical test equipment for front seat belt pre-tensioner connector.• After replacing or reinstalling front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt

pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRC-14, "Diagnosis Description".• Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly.• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.• Never oil tongue and buckle.• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the entire seat belt

assembly.• If webbing is cut, frayed or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.

AFTER A COLLISIONWARNING:Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

S

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the col-lision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do socould result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a colli-sion should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensionersshould be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bagsare deployed.Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and

buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).• The seat belt was damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage

or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision

in which the air bags are deployed.


FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONFRONT SEAT BELTSEAT BELT RETRACTOR

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000004258093

AFTER A COLLISIONWARNING:Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replacedunless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Fail-ure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use dur-ing a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which theair bags are deployed.Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buck-

les show no damage and continue to operate properly).• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or

distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in


PRELIMINARY CHECKS1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:a. Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime

should sound for about six seconds.b. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn off and the chime (if sounding) should

stop.2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III and air bag warning lamp.

Refer to SRC-14, "Diagnosis Description".3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels

freely and that webbing lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly andholds securely.

5. Check retractor operation:a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If

the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Because dirtbuild-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.

c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbingdoes not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPESET” and perform the following steps.

Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.2. Fix the seat belt at the center pillar webbing opening with a clip or other device.3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor webbing opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull it

tauntly while moving it up and down several times along the webbing opening surface to remove dirtstuck there.

4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a cleancloth.

5. Apply tape at the point where the webbing contacts the through-anchor webbing opening. NOTE:Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.


FRONT SEAT BELT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

6. Remove the clip fixing the seat belt and check that the webbing returns smoothly.6. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK

Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)NOTE:All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) theretractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractorsexcept the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (alsocalled child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat beltis fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat beltin a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seatbelt to fully wind back into the retractor.Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop-erly.

ELR Function Stationary CheckGrasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt fromextending further.

ALR Function Stationary Check

1. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.2. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the

retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If

NG, replace the retractor assembly.4. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.

ELR Function Moving Check

WARNING:Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, alarge, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. NEVER perform the following test onwet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and seriouspersonal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that theretractor does not lock.1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.2. Proceed to the designated safe area.3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop

and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor doesnot lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.

During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, per-form the retractor off-vehicle check.

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK1. Remove the seat belt retractor.

Remove the front seat belt assembly, refer to SB-6, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installa-tion".

2. Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position withouttwisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure.


FRONT SEAT BELT
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15degrees or less.

• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 27degrees or more.

Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally.

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004258094

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004258095

REMOVALCAUTION:Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait atleast 3 minutes.1. Remove the outer anchor.

• Remove the outer anchor cover.

A and B : Tilting angles

: Vehicle front

PHIA0954J

1. Anchor cover 2. Anchor bolt 3. Outer anchor

4. Retaining washer 5. Spring washer 6. Spacer

7. Seat belt extension 8. Shoulder anchor 9. Plastic washer

10. Seat belt bracket 11. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector 12. Pre-crash seat belt connector

13. Pre-tensioner seat belt retractor


JMHIA0433GB


FRONT SEAT BELT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the outer anchor.

2. Remove the shoulder anchor.• Remove the shoulder anchor cover.• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the shoulder anchor.

3. Remove the rear side finisher and rear pillar finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".4. Remove the seat belt bracket. Remove the fixing bolt of the seat belt bracket.5. Remove the seat belt assembly.

• Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector.NOTE:• For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector,

insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lockand remove connector.

• Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into connec-tor.

• After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushedsecurely into it.

• Disconnect the pre-crash seat belt connector.• Remove the fixing screw and anchor bolt of the pre-tensioner seat belt retractor.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.SEAT BELT BUCKLE

SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000004258096



distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which

the air bags are deployed.



stop.2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and air bag warning

lamp. Refer to SRC-14, "Diagnosis Description".3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.4. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.

PHIA0953J


FRONT SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004258097

SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004258098

REMOVALRemove the seat belt buckle.• Remove the front seat from vehicle. Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation" (for ease of tool operation

in narrow space).• Disconnect the seat belt buckle harness connector and harness clamp.• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the seat belt buckle.


1. Seat belt buckle harness connector 2. Anchor bolt 3. Retaining washer

4. Washer 5. Spacer 6. Seat belt buckle

7. Wave washer


JMHIA0029GB


REAR SEAT BELT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

REAR SEAT BELTSEAT BELT RETRACTOR

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000004258099



distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in




stop.2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III and air bag warning lamp.

Refer to SRC-14, "Diagnosis Description".3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.4. Check retractor operation:a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If

the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Because dirtbuild-up in the loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.

c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbingdoes not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPESET” and perform the following steps.

5. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK

Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)NOTE:All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) theretractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractorsexcept the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (alsocalled child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat beltis fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat beltin a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seatbelt to fully wind back into the retractor.Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop-erly.

ELR Function Stationary Check


REAR SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt fromextending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check

1. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.2. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the

retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If

NG, replace the retractor assembly.4. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.

ELR Function Moving Check

WARNING:Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, alarge, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. NEVER perform the following test onwet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and seriouspersonal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that theretractor does not lock.1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.2. Proceed to the designated safe area.3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop

and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor doesnot lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.

During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, per-form the retractor off-vehicle check.

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK1. Remove the seat belt retractor.

Remove the rear seat belt assembly, refer to SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installa-tion".

2. Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position withouttwisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure.• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15

degrees or less.• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 27

degrees or more.

Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally.

A and B : Tilting angles

: Vehicle front

PHIA0997J


REAR SEAT BELT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004258100

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004258101

REMOVAL1. Remove the outer and inner anchors.

• Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".• Remove the outer anchor fixing anchor bolt.

2. Remove the seat belt assembly. • Remove the rear seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".• Remove the kicking plate inner, the rear side finisher and the rear pillar finisher. Refer to INT-14,

"Removal and Installation".• Remove the seat belt escutcheon from the rear pillar finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installa-

tion".• Remove the retractor cover.• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the seat belt retractor.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.SEAT BELT BUCKLE

1. Anchor bolt 2. Outer anchor 3. Seat belt buckle

4. Retaining washer 5. Shoulder anchor 6. Spacer

7. Retractor cover 8. Seat belt retractor


JMHIA0434GB


REAR SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000004258102


les show no damage and continue to operate properly).• The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or

distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which

the air bags are deployed.

PRELIMINARY CHECKS1. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.2. Repeat step above as necessary to check the other seat belts.

SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004258103

JMHIA0434GB


REAR SEAT BELT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004258104

REMOVALRemove the seat belt buckle.• Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the inner anchor.


1. Anchor bolt 2. Outer anchor 3. Seat belt buckle

4. Retaining washer 5. Shoulder anchor 6. Spacer

7. Retractor cover 8. Seat belt retractor



LATCH SYSTEM FOR CHILDREN
LATCH SYSTEM FOR CHILDREN



REMOVALCAUTION:Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tether for Children) system.


1. LATCH system


JMHIA0435GB


TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


S

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT



REMOVALCAUTION:Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. 1. Remove the top tether strap child restraint cover. Refer to INT-17, "Exploded View".2. Remove the top tether strap child restraint.


1. Anchor bolt 2. Anchor plate 3. Spacer

4. Fiber washer


JMHIA0436GB


infiniti G37-09-Coupe6

Documents

Transcript of infiniti G37-09-Coupe6